diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv
deleted file mode 100644
index 34e8287149..0000000000
--- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,851 +0,0 @@
-Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
-GAL	front	intro	i6u9			0		# Introduction to Galatians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of Galatians<br><br>1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).<br>1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).<br>1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).<br>1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other’s burdens (5:1-6:10).<br>1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?<br><br>Paul wrote the book of Galatians. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus and establishing churches.<br><br>It is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some Bible scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus and establish churches. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.<br><br>### What is the Book of Galatians about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. In the book of Galatians Paul explains that people are saved as result of believing in Jesus and not as a result of obeying the law of Moses and he proves this by using various Old Testament passages to illustrate this truth. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Galatians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Galatia.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What does it mean to “live like Jews” (2:14)?<br><br>To “live like Jews” means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people who taught that it was necessary to follow the law of Moses in addition to believing in Jesus were called “Judaizers.”<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### How did Paul use the terms “law” and “grace” in the Book of Galatians?<br><br>These terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called “the law of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” and “in Christ Jesus?” <br><br>Paul uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” or the related phrase “in Christ Jesus” very frequently in this letter. This expression occurs with a metaphorical meaning in 1:22; 2:4,17; 3:14, 26, 28; and 5:6. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the people who believe in him. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to identify that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. Sometimes when Paul uses the phrase “in Christ” he intends a different meaning. See, for example, 2:16 where Paul says “we also believed in Christ Jesus, so that we might be justified by faith in Christ” and see 2:17 where Paul spoke of Christ being the object of faith when he said “when we seek for God to justify us in Christ.” See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?<br>* “Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes” (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, “[so] that ye should not obey the truth.” Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-GAL	1	intro	f3n5			0		# Galatians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was “not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones.” Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Heresy<br><br>God eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])<br><br>### Paul’s qualifications<br><br>Some people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But Paul still needed God to save him through believing in Jesus. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “You are turning so quickly to a different gospel”<br><br>The Book of Galatians is one of Paul’s earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	1	o4ns		Παῦλος	1		Here, Paul is introducing himself as the author of this letter. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Use that here. Alternate translation: “This letter is from me, Paul”
-GAL	1	1	uhhp	figs-123person	Παῦλος	1		Paul is speaking of himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “This letter is from me, Paul” or “I, Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
-GAL	1	1	m4ss	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἀπ’ ἀνθρώπων, οὐδὲ δι’ ἀνθρώπου	1	General Information:	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate this phrase using only one negative word. Alternate translation: “not from men or through man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-GAL	1	1	rcnw	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἀπ’ ἀνθρώπων	1		Here, the word **from** indicates source. The phrase **not from men** means that humans are not the source of Paul’s apostleship and that he was not commissioned or appointed an apostle by humans. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “not through the commissioning of humans” or “not through human commission” or “not sent out by people” or “not because I was appointed and sent by a group of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	1	yqma	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων & ἀνθρώπου	1		Although the terms **men** and **man** are masculine, Paul uses them here in a generic sense to refer to humans in general. Alternate translation: “humans … humans” or “people … a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	1	1	k2dw		δι’ ἀνθρώπου, ἀλλὰ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς	1		Both times that the word **through** is used in this verse it indicates agency/means and refers to the agency/means by which Paul’s was commissioned as an apostle. Choose the best word in your language to indicate the meaning of the word **through** here. Alternate translation: “through the agency of man, but through the agency of Jesus Christ and God the Father”
-GAL	1	1	pvdp	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here, the word **but** introduces a contrast between different potential agents or means of Paul’s commission. The word **but** is introducing a contrast between Paul’s apostleship being **not through man** but rather being **through Jesus Christ and God the Father**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	1	1	fyu8	figs-distinguish	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		The phrase **the one having raised him from the dead** gives further information about **God the Father**. It is not making a distinction between **God the Father** and **the one having raised him from the dead** as if they are two separate entities. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “God the Father who is the same one who made Jesus Christ live again after he died” or “God the Father who caused Jesus Christ to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-GAL	1	1	wmlj	figs-extrainfo	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς	1		Here, the phrase **the Father** could be (1) a general title for God which identifies him as the first person in the Christian Trinity. If you choose this option then you should not define whose **Father** God is in your translation but rather you should use a more an expression like the ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) (2) referring to God’s relationship to those who believe in Christ. Alternate translation: “God our Father”
-GAL	1	1	w3gr	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from among the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-GAL	1	1	g5as	figs-metonymy	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1		Here, the phrase **the dead** could be a figurative way of referring to a place, in which case it would be referring to “the place of the dead” or “the realm of the dead.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the place of the dead” or “from the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	1	2	d737	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here, although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it in a generic sense to refer to fellow Christians, which includes both men and women. Paul views all those who believe in Jesus, as members of one spiritual family, with God as their heavenly Father. If your readers would misunderstand the use of **brothers** in this context, you can indicate explicitly what it means as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	1	2	wmd2	figs-explicit	Γαλατίας	1		Here, the word **Galatia** could refer to: (1) the Roman political province called **Galatia**. Alternate translation: “in the province of Galatia” or (2) the geographical region known as **Galatia**. Alternate translation: “in the region of Galatia” If it would help your readers you could state explicitly what the word **Galatia** refers to here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	2	aa9v	figs-possession	τῆς Γαλατίας	1		Paul uses the possessive form here to describe churches that are in Roman political province called **Galatia** or in the geographical region known as **Galatia**. If this use of the possessive form is not clear in your language, you could clarify the meaning using a form that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in the province of Galatia” or “in the region of Galatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	1	3	nxtz	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη	1		This is a common blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
-GAL	1	3	psjz	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **Grace** and **peace**, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace** and **peace** with adjectives such as “gracious” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “May God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and make you peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	1	3	nykr	figs-you	ὑμῖν	1		Here, the word **you** is plural and refers to the Galatians. Unless noted otherwise, all instances of “you” and “your” in this letter refer to the Galatians and are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-GAL	1	3	c1xf		Θεοῦ Πατρὸς	1		See how you chose to translate the phrase **God the Father** in [1:1](../01/01.md).
-GAL	1	3	eivd	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Here, the word **our** refers to Paul, the believers in Galatia, and all believers in Jesus and so is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. In this book, unless otherwise stated, the word “our” refers to Paul, the believers in Galatia, and all believers and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	1	4	onj6	figs-distinguish	τοῦ δόντος ἑαυτὸν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν, ὅπως ἐξέληται ἡμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος πονηροῦ	1		The phrase **the one having given himself for our sins so that he might deliver us from the present evil age** gives us further information about “our Lord Jesus Christ.” It is not making a distinction between them as if they were two different entities. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one having given himself for our sins so that he might deliver us from the present evil age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-GAL	1	4	yk9g	figs-metonymy	περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1	for our sins	Here, **sins** figuratively refers to the punishment for sin and the phrase **for our sins** refers to Christ giving his life “as a substitution for the punishment that our sins deserved.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “as a substitution for the punishment that our sins deserved” or “to take the punishment we deserved because of our sins” or “to take the punishment for our sins” or “as a substitution for the punishment that our sins deserved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	1	4	f2pm		ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν	1		See the note on **our** in [1:3](../01/03.md).
-GAL	1	4	haib	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sins**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “sinful,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	1	4	d8m2	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὅπως	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Christ gave himself for our sins. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	1	4	f6d5	figs-metonymy	ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος πονηροῦ	1	that he might deliver us from this present evil age	Here, the phrase **the present evil age**, refers not only to a time period but also refers to the sinful attitudes and actions that characterize **the present evil age**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from this present time that is dominated by sinfulness” or “from this present evil age with it’s evil attitudes and desires” or “from the evil powers at work in the world today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	1	4	mg01	figs-distinguish	τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1		The phrase **and Father** gives further information about **our God**. It is not making a distinction between **God** and **Father** as if they are two separate entities. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these words more clear. Alternate translation: “of our God who is our Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-GAL	1	5	y7mj	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δόξα	1		The phrase **be the glory** is an expression of praise. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “praise”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	1	5	miju	translate-transliterate	ἀμήν	1		**Amen** is a Hebrew word. Paul spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. He assumes that they know that it means “so be it” or “yes indeed.” In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds in your language. If your readers would not know what **Amen** means, you could also explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Amen, which means, ‘So be it!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-GAL	1	6	f74p		θαυμάζω	1	I am amazed	Alternate translation: “I am surprised” or “I am shocked”
-GAL	1	6	v438	figs-explicit	οὕτως ταχέως, μετατίθεσθε	1	you are turning away so quickly from him	Here, the phrase **turning away** means “to desert” and refers to turning ones heart or mind away from believing and following something. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are so quickly deserting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	6	ficf	figs-explicit	μετατίθεσθε	1		The phrase **you are turning away** is in the present tense and is portraying the action of **turning away** as in process, but not yet completed. Make sure that you express this phrase in your language in a way that shows that the Galatians **turning away** is currently happening but not complete. (Paul is writing this letter in order to encourage the Galatians to not turn away to **a different gospel**).
-GAL	1	6	cw1j	figs-explicit	οὕτως ταχέως	1		Here, the phrase **so quickly** means that the Galatians were turning away from faith in the true gospel shortly after they accepted it. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the true gospel so soon after accepting it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	6	ht94	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τοῦ καλέσαντος ὑμᾶς	1		Here, the phrase **the one** refers to “God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and from God, who is the one who has called you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	6	qy93	figs-explicit	καλέσαντος	1		Here, the phrase **called** refers to being “chosen” by God. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	6	ghhs		ἐν	1		Here, the word **in** could (1) refer to the Galatians being called “into” the sphere or realm of grace. Alternate translation: “into” or “to live in” (2) refer to the means by which the Galatians were saved. Alternate translation: “by” or “through”
-GAL	1	6	cizk	figs-abstractnouns	χάριτι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “graciously”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	1	7	l5ep	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλο	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “another gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	1	7	rg69	grammar-connect-exceptions	εἰ μή τινές εἰσιν οἱ ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ θέλοντες μεταστρέψαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If, in your language, the use of the word **except** makes it appear as if Paul is making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “instead certain people are causing you trouble and want to pervert the gospel of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-GAL	1	7	wnfe		τινές	1		Alternate translation: “certain people”
-GAL	1	7	kswu	figs-abstractnouns	ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trouble**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “troubling,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “troubling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	1	7	tec2		μεταστρέψαι	1		Alternate translation: “to twist the truth of” or “to change”
-GAL	1	7	k9d1	figs-possession	τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		By using the possessive form here, Paul is either using it to: (1) describe the gospel that is about Christ, in which case the possessive form is being used to describe the content of the gospel. Alternate translation: “the gospel about Christ” (2) designate Christ as the one who proclaimed the gospel message he is referring to in which case Paul is referring to the gospel message that Christ preached. Alternate translation: “the gospel that Christ proclaimed” or “the gospel that Christ preached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	1	8	rltx	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	καὶ ἐὰν ἡμεῖς ἢ ἄγγελος ἐξ οὐρανοῦ εὐαγγελίζηται ὑμῖν παρ’ ὃ εὐηγγελισάμεθα ὑμῖν, ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1		The word **if** introduces a hypothetical situation. Paul is using a hypothetical situation to warn the Galatians against any teaching that is contrary to the original gospel message that they were taught. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “if it were to happen that we or an angel from heaven might proclaim to you a gospel other than the one we proclaimed to you, let whoever would do that be cursed” or “suppose it were to happen that we or an angel from heaven might proclaim to you a gospel other than the one we proclaimed to you, let whoever would do that be cursed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-GAL	1	8	wnx5	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		When Paul says **we**, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	1	8	ebyi		ἡμεῖς	1		Alternate translation: “I or my co-laborers in the gospel”
-GAL	1	8	f1ef		εὐαγγελίζηται ὑμῖν	1		Alternate translation: “proclaim to you a gospel message” or “a message of good news”
-GAL	1	8	s5uq	figs-explicit	παρ’ ὃ εὐηγγελισάμεθα	1	other than the one	Here, the phrase **the one** refers to the gospel message that Paul and his co-laborers had proclaimed to the Galatians. If your readers might misunderstand this you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “different from the gospel we proclaimed” or “different from the message we proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	8	xb2c		ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1	let him be cursed	If your language has a common way of asking God to curse someone, or of calling down a curse on someone, and it would be appropriate to use in this context, consider using it here.
-GAL	1	8	kv9h	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of someone being **cursed**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “curse.” Alternate translation: “let God curse him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	1	8	pifk	figs-activepassive	ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “let God curse him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	1	8	g7zz	figs-gendernotations	ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1		Although the term **him** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “let God curse that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	1	9	anxe	figs-exclusive	προειρήκαμεν	1		When Paul says **we**, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	1	9	h1ht	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις ὑμᾶς εὐαγγελίζεται	1		The word **If** introduces a hypothetical situation. Paul is using a hypothetical situation to warn the Galatians against any teaching that is contrary to the original gospel message that they were taught. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “If it were to happen that someone proclaims to you a gospel” or “Suppose it were to happen that someone proclaims to you a gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-GAL	1	9	i2wk	figs-explicit	παρ’ ὃ	1		See how you translated the phrase **other than the one** in [1:8](../01/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	9	mrv9	figs-activepassive	ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1		See how you translated the phrase **let him be cursed** in [1:8](../01/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	1	9	eta3	figs-gendernotations	ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1		Although the term **him** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how you translated the phrase **let him be cursed** in [1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “let God curse that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	1	10	ifod	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** is being used to introduce Paul’s argument against an implied assertion that he altered the content of his gospel message in order to make it more acceptable to people. If it would help your readers, you could express the implied assertion explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	1	10	b2vc	figs-rquestion	ἄρτι γὰρ ἀνθρώπους πείθω ἢ τὸν Θεόν? ἢ ζητῶ ἀνθρώποις ἀρέσκειν	1	For am I now seeking the approval of men or God? Am I seeking to please men?	By using these two rhetorical questions Paul is not asking the Galatians for information, but is using the question form for emphasis and to engage his readers thinking. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “For I do not seek to persuade men, but instead I only seek the approval of God! I am not seeking to please men!” or “For I do not seek the approval of men, but instead I only seek the approval of God! I am not seeking to please men!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	1	10	xhrn	figs-gendernotations	ἄρτι & ἀνθρώπους πείθω ἢ τὸν Θεόν? ἢ ζητῶ ἀνθρώποις ἀρέσκειν? εἰ ἔτι ἀνθρώποις ἤρεσκον	1		Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women, and refers to “people” in general. Alternate translation: “do I now persuade people, or God? Or do I seek to please people? If I were still pleasing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	1	10	fl3c	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ ἔτι ἀνθρώποις ἤρεσκον, Χριστοῦ δοῦλος οὐκ ἂν ἤμην	1	If I am still trying to please men, I am not a servant of Christ	The word **if** introduces a hypothetical condition. Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatians. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation or if it would help your readers you can state Paul’s meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “I am not still trying to please men because I am a servant of Christ” or “If I were still pleasing people, then I would not be serving Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-GAL	1	11	xve4	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** is used to introduce a supporting statement that further supports and gives reason for Paul’s prior statement. Use a form that would be natural in your language for introducing a statement that supports a prior statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	1	11	cnic	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1		Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	1	11	o5cu	figs-activepassive	τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν ὑπ’ ἐμοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that I proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	1	11	hew1	figs-gendernotations	ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women, and refers to “humans.” Alternate translation: “did not come from a human” or “is not a human message” or “is not a message that people made up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	1	12	zfxj	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** could be being used to introduce: (1) the grounds or basis for Paul’s assertion in [1:11](../01/11.md), in which case what follows the word **For** is support for what Paul said in [1:11](../01/11.md). Use a form that would be natural for introducing a statement which gives supporting evidence. Alternate translation: “In support of my claim that the gospel I proclaimed is not according to man, I want you to know that” (2) a statement which explains and builds on Paul’s assertion in [1:11](../01/11.md). Use a form that would be natural for introducing a statement which further clarifies and explains a prior statement. Alternate translation: “To explain further, I want you to know” or “That is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	1	12	kdol	figs-parallelism	οὐδὲ & ἐγὼ παρὰ ἀνθρώπου παρέλαβον αὐτό, οὔτε ἐδιδάχθην	1		The phrase **I did not receive it from man** and the phrase **nor was I taught it** mean basically the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I did not receive the gospel that I proclaim from any person” or “no human being taught me the gospel that I proclaim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-GAL	1	12	er9c	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women, and refers to “humans.” See how you translated the word **man** in [1:11](../01/11.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “people” or “humans” or “a human source” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	1	12	y2am	figs-activepassive	ἐδιδάχθην	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	1	12	hlg6	figs-explicit	αὐτό & ἐδιδάχθην	1		Here, both occurrences of the word **it** refer back to “the gospel” which Paul “proclaimed” which he mentioned in [1:11](../01/11.md). If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gospel that I proclaimed … was I taught the gospel that I proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	12	qohz	figs-ellipsis	ἐδιδάχθην	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “was I taught it by any person” or “was I taught it by man” or “was I taught it by a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	1	12	g1o6	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		What follows the word **but** is in contrast to the phrases **receive it from man** and **taught it**. In contrast to Paul receiving the message he proclaimed from a human source or being **taught it** Paul received it from a divine source. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “rather” or “instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	1	12	leqs		δι’	1		Alternate translation: “through a”
-GAL	1	12	uybt	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποκαλύψεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	1	12	wed1	figs-possession	δι’ ἀποκαλύψεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	it was by revelation of Jesus Christ to me	Paul could be using the possessive form here to mean: (1) that God revealed Jesus Christ to Paul. This would mean that God is the one who did the revealing and Jesus Christ is the one who God revealed. See the phrase “to reveal his Son in me” in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “God revealed Jesus Christ to me” or “God made me know the gospel when he showed Jesus Christ to me” (2) that it was Jesus Christ who made the revelation to Paul. Alternate translation: “by what Jesus Christ revealed to me” (3) both option 1 and 2 together. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ revealed himself to me and taught me the gospel about himself” or “Jesus Christ revealed himself to me and taught me the gospel concerning himself”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	1	12	nee4	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ δι’ ἀποκαλύψεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I received it by a revelation of Jesus Christ” or “but I was taught it by a revelation of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	1	13	f3gl	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐμὴν ἀναστροφήν ποτε	1	former life	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **manner** and **life**, you could express the same idea with a verbal phrase such as “how I formerly lived”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “how I formerly lived” or “how I formerly conducted myself” or “how I formerly behaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	1	13	r8ol	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ Ἰουδαϊσμῷ	1		Here, the phrase **in Judaism** refers to following the Jewish religious guidelines. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “following the Jewish religion” or “following the Jewish religious guidelines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	13	ydx9	figs-idiom	καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν	1		The phrase **beyond measure** is an idiom meaning “excessively.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “excessively” or “to an extreme degree” or “intensely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	1	14	vtug	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ Ἰουδαϊσμῷ	1		See how you translated the phrase **in Judaism** in [1:13](../01/13.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “in the Jewish religion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	14	aecd		τῷ γένει	1		Alternate translation: “nation”
-GAL	1	14	gdwi	grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ γένει μου	1		The word **race** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “my ethnic group the Jews” or “my people the Jews” or “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-GAL	1	14	bcdo	figs-metaphor	τῶν πατρικῶν μου	1		Here, the word **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” If your readers would not understand what **fathers** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “of my ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	1	15	w6zi	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what was expected. What would be expected is that Paul would continue thinking and acting according to the way he formerly did as described in [1:14](../01/14.md). Instead, God **called** Paul, and as the next verse says, God revealed Jesus to him, so that he might teach the Gentiles about Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	1	15	ofqm	figs-explicit	ὁ	1		Here, the phrase **the one** refers to God. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	15	qu8s	figs-distinguish	ὅτε & εὐδόκησεν ὁ, ἀφορίσας με ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός μου, καὶ καλέσας διὰ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1		The statement **having set me apart from the womb of my mother and having called {me} through his grace** gives us further information about the **the one** (God). It is not making a distinction. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “when God, who is the one who set me apart from my mother’s womb and called me through his grace, was pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-GAL	1	15	iyc1	figs-idiom	ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός μου	1		The phrase **from the womb of my mother** is a Hebrew idiom which means either “from the day of my birth” or “from before birth.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from the day I was born” or “from before I was born.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	1	15	wd26	figs-explicit	καλέσας	1	who called me through his grace	Here, the word **called** means “to choose and summon.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having chosen and summoned me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	15	wlph	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χάριτος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	1	16	l97h		ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ	1	to reveal his Son in me	The phrase **reveal his Son in me** could mean: (1) that God revealed his Son “to” Paul and refer to God revealing to Paul who Jesus really was so that Paul had an inward knowledge of who Jesus really was. Alternate translation: “to reveal to me his Son” (2) that God revealed his Son to others “through” Paul. Alternate translation: “to reveal his Son to others through me” or “to reveal his Son to others by me”
-GAL	1	16	z800	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. After the phrase **so that** Paul states the purpose for which God revealed his Son to Paul, namely so that he **might preach him among the Gentiles**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	1	16	xx4c		εὐαγγελίζωμαι αὐτὸν	1	preach him	Alternate translation: “I might proclaim the good news about God’s Son”
-GAL	1	16	qme5	figs-synecdoche	σαρκὶ καὶ αἵματι	1	consult with flesh and blood	Paul refers figuratively to “human beings” by naming a few of the things that a human being is made of, specifically **flesh and blood**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “any human being” or “any person” or “anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-GAL	1	17	qh88	figs-go	ἀνῆλθον εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	go up to Jerusalem	**Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “come” rather than **go** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did I come up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-GAL	1	17	w82a	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		What follows the word **Instead** is in contrast to what was expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	1	17	zqih	figs-go	ἀπῆλθον εἰς	1		Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-GAL	1	18	c7gb	grammar-connect-time-sequential	ἔπειτα	1		The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. Use a natural form in your language for indicating this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-GAL	1	18	rej5	figs-go	ἀνῆλθον εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1		**Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-GAL	1	19	av43	grammar-connect-exceptions	ἕτερον & τῶν ἀποστόλων οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ Ἰάκωβον	1	I saw none of the other apostles except James	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only other apostles I saw were James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-GAL	1	20	d9yv	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1		**behold** is an exclamation word which is used to draw attention to the words that come next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “pay attention to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-GAL	1	20	h3cb	figs-litotes	οὐ ψεύδομαι	1	In what I write to you, I assure you before God, that I am not lying	Here, Paul uses a phrase that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am telling you the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-GAL	1	20	pp11	figs-explicit	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **before God** is an oath. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an oath from your language that would be appropriate in this context or you could make it clear in your translation that Paul is making an oath. Alternate translation: “I solemnly testify before God” or “in God’s presence I testify” or “I swear with God as my witness” or “I swear before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	21	ny6z	grammar-connect-time-sequential	ἔπειτα ἦλθον εἰς	1		The word **then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events Paul has just described in [1:18-19](../01/18.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase or by expressing the meaning in some other way that is natural to your readers. Alternate translation: “After I left Jerusalem I went to” or “After that I went to” or “Afterwards I went to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-GAL	1	22	y6l4	figs-activepassive	ἤμην & ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ	1	I was still not personally known to the churches of Judea that are in Christ	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “none of the people in the churches of Judea that are in Christ had ever met me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	1	22	wleq	figs-synecdoche	ἤμην & ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Paul uses the main feature of his appearance, his **face**, to refer figuratively to seeing his entire person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-GAL	1	22	sr0y	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union believers have with Christ and here it is specifically describing/modifying **the churches of Judea**. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe what the phrase “in Christ” means here. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	1	23	bdmz	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast between what the Judean believers did know about Paul (they were **hearing** that he was **now proclaiming the faith**) with what they did not know about Paul (how he looked, [1:22](../01/22.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	1	23	hw08		μόνον & ἀκούοντες ἦσαν	1		Alternate translation: “all that the believers in the region of Judea knew about me was that people were saying” or “all that the people belonging to the churches in the region of Judea knew about me was that people were saying”
-GAL	1	23	ss1e	figs-explicit	ὁ	1		Here, the phrase **The one** refers to Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	23	bh1m	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πίστιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	1	23	lo0r	figs-metonymy	τὴν πίστιν	1		Paul is figuratively describing the message about Jesus (the gospel) by association with **faith**, which is the response that the message about Jesus requires or solicits. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” or “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	1	23	y5ud	figs-explicit	ἐπόρθει	1		Here, the word **destroying** refers to trying to stop the spread of the Christian message. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	1	24	qp4t	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν ἐμοὶ	1		Here, the phrase **in me** means “because of me” and is giving the reason why the Judean believers were praising God, namely because of Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	1	24	cpni		ἐν ἐμοὶ	1		The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me”
-GAL	2	intro	xe28			0		# Galatians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Freedom and slavery<br><br>Throughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “I do not negate the grace of God”<br><br>Paul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-GAL	2	1	mtgj	grammar-connect-time-sequential	ἔπειτα	1		The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. See how you translated the word **Then** in [1:18](../01/18.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-GAL	2	1	zt61		ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	Connecting Statement:	See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md).
-GAL	2	1	zth5		ἀνέβην	1	went up	Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-GAL	2	2	e8xu	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1		Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-GAL	2	2	ll4j	figs-go	ἀνέβην	1		See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-GAL	2	2	szwl		κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν	1		The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate that Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “because God told me to” or “because God revealed to me that I should” or “because God showed me that I should” (2) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to a revelation” or “in accord with what God had revealed to me”
-GAL	2	2	zvkg	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	2	g384	figs-explicit	ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς	1		Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	2	ypg1	figs-ellipsis	κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but privately I set it before the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	2	2	msv4		τοῖς δοκοῦσιν	1	those who seemed to be important	Alternate translation: “to the men who seemed to be influential” or “to those who were recognized as leaders of the believers in Jerusalem” or “to those who were leaders of the church in Jerusalem”
-GAL	2	2	t6we	figs-doublenegatives	μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον	1	in vain	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “to ensure I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-GAL	2	2	ejb8	figs-metaphor	τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον	1	I was not running—or had not run—in vain	Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	2	2	svvy		εἰς κενὸν	1		Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing”
-GAL	2	3	wyrr	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		Here, the word **But** is introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]
-GAL	2	3	ybww	figs-distinguish	ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν	1		The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-GAL	2	3	xs8k	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι	1	to be circumcised	The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	2	4	kwoz		διὰ δὲ & ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν	1		The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be giving the reason why some people were demanding that Titus be circumcised. Alternate translation: “But this issue occurred because of” (2) be connected to [2:1-2](../02/01.md) and be giving the reason why Paul “went up again to Jerusalem” (2:1) and privately “set before” (communicated to) the church leaders in Jerusalem the gospel that he proclaimed among the Gentiles (2:2). Alternate translation: “But I talked to them privately because” or “But we went to Jerusalem because of” (3) be beginning a sentence which Paul never completes. Alternate translation (notice that only the punctuation differs from the ULT, the closing “—” indicates that Paul does not complete his thought before moving onto the next verse): “But it was because of … so that they will enslave us—”
-GAL	2	4	j5ka	figs-metaphor	παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι	1	The false brothers came in secretly	Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. By using this metaphor Paul means that these people had bad motives for wanting to observe the believers. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	2	4	jx0q		παρεισάκτους	1		In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the phrase **brought in** could mean: (1) that these **false brothers** were invited in by someone. Alternate translation: “secretly invited” or (2) that they came into the midst of the believers by their own initiative. Alternate translation: “deceptive coming of”
-GAL	2	4	fpkc	figs-explicit	ψευδαδέλφους	1		Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	4	etlo	figs-abstractnouns	κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	4	lyqj	figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν	1		When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	2	4	uvjw	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union that believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” or “through our union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	2	4	v9fp	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which the **false brothers** spied on their freedom, to **enslave them**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	2	4	l7n7	figs-metaphor	ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν	1	to make us slaves	Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	2	5	pow3	figs-exclusive	εἴξαμεν	1		When Paul says **we**, he is not including the Galatian Christians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	2	5	w6dm	figs-explicit	οἷς οὐδὲ & εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ	1		Here, to **not … yield in submission** means “to not agree with and comply with the demands of” the people who said that Titus needed to be circumcised. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “we did not give in to their demands” or “we did not comply with what they wanted us to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	5	bba7	figs-abstractnouns	εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ	1	yield in submission	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **submission**, you could express the same idea with a verbal phrase as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	5	smpn	figs-idiom	ὥραν	1		Here, the phrase **an hour** refers to a short period of time. If you have an equivalent expression in your culture you could use that or if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate Paul’s meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “a short period of time” or “a short amount of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	2	5	a3hr	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Paul and his ministry partners **did not … yield in submission** to those who taught that circumcision was necessary. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	2	5	k61r	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “true” and/or “correct,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	5	bqqq	figs-possession	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1		Here, the possessive form is used to describe the **truth** that belongs to and is contained within **the gospel** message. It is also being used to contrast the genuine and correct gospel with “false gospels” such as the one Paul is refuting in this letter. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	2	6	xcdh	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce something that is in contrast to what the “false brothers” in [2:4](../02/04.md) wanted to do. The “false brothers” wanted to “enslave” the believers by adding the requirement of circumcision to the gospel message. Beginning in this verse Paul explains (in [2:6-10](../6/06.md)) that, in contrast to the actions of the “false brothers,” the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not require that Paul add anything to the content of his gospel message. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]
-GAL	2	6	rfvs	figs-explicit	τῶν δοκούντων εἶναί τι	1		The phrase **the ones seeming to be something•• implies the word “important” and is very similar in meaning to the phrase ••the ones seeming important** at the end of this verse. If it would help your readers, you could express the implied word explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ones seeming to be something important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	6	flz3		ὁποῖοί ποτε ἦσαν, οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει, πρόσωπον ὁ Θεὸς ἀνθρώπου οὐ λαμβάνει	1		The phrase **what sort they were formerly matters nothing to me; God does not accept the face of man** is a parenthetical statement. Use a natural form in your language for introducing and/or expressing a parenthetical statement.
-GAL	2	6	zrw5	figs-explicit	ὁποῖοί	1		The phrase **what sort** implies the word “people.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “what sort of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	6	st6l	figs-explicit	ὁποῖοί ποτε ἦσαν, οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει	1		The phrase **what sort they were formerly matters nothing to me** does not mean that Paul did not regard these people’s character as important but rather it means that he did not let their status influence his decision making. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	6	c9xx	figs-idiom	πρόσωπον ὁ Θεὸς ἀνθρώπου οὐ λαμβάνει	1		Here, the term **face** means “external status and position.” The phrase **God does not accept the face of man** is an idiom which means that God does not base his judgements and decisions on external factors. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “God does not judge with partiality” or “God does not look at external factors when making decisions” or “God does not show partiality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	2	6	nm0b	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a general sense to mean all people in general, including women. Alternate translation: “of a person” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
-GAL	2	6	ku3t		οἱ δοκοῦντες	1		See how you translated the similar phrase “those who seemed to be important” in [2:2](../02/02.md).
-GAL	2	6	afy6	figs-metonymy	ἐμοὶ & οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο	1	added nothing to me	Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	2	7	visz	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ τοὐναντίον	1		Paul uses the phrase **But on the contrary** to introduce a contrast to the idea that the leaders in Jerusalem might have added anything to the content of his message. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	2	7	l5m5	figs-explicit	ἰδόντες	1		Here, the phrase **having seen** means “having understood**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	7	vlpz	figs-activepassive	πεπίστευμαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God entrusted me with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	2	7	m5e5	figs-metonymy	ἀκροβυστίας, καθὼς Πέτρος τῆς περιτομῆς	1		Paul is describing non-Jewish people by association with something they would not have had done to them, circumcision, and he is describing Jewish people by association with something they would have had done to them, circumcision. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	2	8	tmva		ὁ γὰρ ἐνεργήσας Πέτρῳ εἰς ἀποστολὴν τῆς περιτομῆς, ἐνήργησεν καὶ ἐμοὶ εἰς τὰ ἔθνη	1		This entire verse is a parenthetical statement. In this verse Paul gives the reason why the leaders of the church in Jerusalem determined that Paul was authorized and commissioned by God to bring the gospel to non-Jews. Use a natural form in your language for introducing and/or expressing a parenthetical statement.
-GAL	2	8	yh9s	figs-explicit	ὁ	1		Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	8	e5wv	figs-metonymy	τῆς περιτομῆς	1		See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	2	8	n1b6	figs-ellipsis	ἐνήργησεν καὶ ἐμοὶ εἰς τὰ ἔθνη	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “also worked in me for apostleship to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	2	9	qfp1	figs-abstractnouns	γνόντες τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι	1		The abstract noun *grace** refers to God graciously giving Paul the task of proclaiming the gospel to non-Jews. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “graciously” or “kindly” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having understood the task that God had graciously given to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	9	dt40	figs-activepassive	τὴν δοθεῖσάν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	2	9	k66v		οἱ δοκοῦντες & εἶναι	1		See how you translated the phrase **the ones seeming to be** in [2:2](../02/02.md).
-GAL	2	9	he6q	figs-metaphor	οἱ δοκοῦντες στῦλοι εἶναι	1	built up the church	Here, **pillars** refers to James, Cephas and John, who were leaders of the believers in Jerusalem. In that culture important leaders of a group were sometimes referred to as **pillars** because of the support that they provided the group. If your readers would not understand what **pillars** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	2	9	e5rm	translate-symaction	δεξιὰς ἔδωκαν & κοινωνίας	1	gave … the right hand of fellowship	Here, **gave the right hand** is an action that indicates agreement. Shaking hands indicated that they agreed with each other and were pledging to work together as ministry partners towards the same goal. Essentially, they would be in fellowship and shaking each others right hand indicated this. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-GAL	2	9	yxvz	figs-abstractnouns	κοινωνίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fellowship**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	9	bl9v	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which **James and Cephas and John … gave the right hand of fellowship to Barnabas** and Paul. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	2	9	uuss	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς εἰς τὰ ἔθνη, αὐτοὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν περιτομήν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The words he is leaving out are probably “go” or “proclaim the good news.” If it would help your readers, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we would go to the Gentiles, and they would go the circumcision” or “we would proclaim the good news to the Gentiles, and they would proclaim the good news to the circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	2	9	j031	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	2	9	n8en	figs-metonymy	τὴν περιτομήν	1		See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	2	10	fpj8	grammar-connect-exceptions	μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵνα μνημονεύωμεν	1		Here, the word **only** introduces an exception clause that qualifies Paul’s statement at the end of [2:6](../02/06.md), where Paul said that the leaders in Jerusalem “added nothing” to his message (meaning they did not require him to do or teach anything else). Use an appropriate form in your language so that it does not appear that Paul is making a statement here that contradicts his statement at the end of [2:6](../02/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-GAL	2	10	v265	figs-exclusive	μνημονεύωμεν	1		When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	2	10	bbdk	figs-explicit	τῶν πτωχῶν & μνημονεύωμεν	1		Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	10	yfu3	figs-nominaladj	πτωχῶν	1		Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-GAL	2	11	rdi8	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast. The actions that Paul will describe in [2:11-13](../02/11.md) are in contrast to the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	2	11	yuav	figs-go	ἦλθεν	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-GAL	2	11	c9h4	figs-idiom	κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην	1	I opposed him to his face	The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly, face to face. If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. (See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md)). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	2	11	cr74	figs-explicit	κατεγνωσμένος ἦν	1		Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	11	qvig	translate-versebridge	ὅτε δὲ ἦλθεν Κηφᾶς εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην, ὅτι κατεγνωσμένος ἦν	1		This verse gives the result of Cephas’ hypocritical actions, and [2:12-13](../02/12.md) gives the reason for (and explanation leading to) the result. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by placing verse 12 and 13 before the contents of this verse as modeled by the UST. You would need to adapt or not translate the first phrase in [2:14](../02/14.md), “But when” so that [2:14](../02/14.md) begins with (or with something similar to) the phrase “I saw” as modeled by the UST. You would then present the combined verses as 11-13. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge)
-GAL	2	12	yeeb	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s reason for why he “opposed” Cephas “to his face” (see [2:11](../02/11.md)) and for why Paul claimed in [2:11](../02/11.md) that Cephas “stood condemned.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. If it would be more natural in your language to state the reason for an action before giving the result see the note for [2:11](../02/11.md) on creating a verse bridge. Alternate translation: “The reason is that” or “The reason that Peter stood condemned is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	2	12	hqcc	figs-go	ἐλθεῖν & ἦλθον	1		Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-GAL	2	12	b23d	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	2	12	a6gv		ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν	1	kept away from	Alternate translation: “stayed away from”
-GAL	2	12	z1kg	figs-explicit	φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	He was afraid of those who were demanding circumcision	If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly as modeled by the UST. See [6:12](../06/12.md) where Paul says that those trying to compel the Galatian believers were doing so because the did not want to be persecuted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	12	fy79	figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	those who were demanding circumcision	See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	2	13	urwh	figs-explicit	οἱ λοιποὶ Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, the phrase **the rest of the Jews** refers only to the other Jewish believers who were in Antioch. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	13	nkrh	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	2	13	iau6	figs-explicit	συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει	1		Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	13	v4cj	figs-activepassive	καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	2	13	vmkj	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	14	k16c	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	2	14	sg53	figs-metonymy	οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν	1	not following the truth of the gospel	Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	2	14	va3a	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	14	s978	figs-quotations	εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν	1		This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) are a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of this verse are a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-GAL	2	14	z4fp	figs-rquestion	εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν	1	how can you force the Gentiles to live like Jews?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help Cephas understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	2	14	qlzt	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-GAL	2	14	ish9	figs-yousingular	σὺ & ἀναγκάζεις	1		Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-GAL	2	15	vjsh	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		When Paul says **We** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	2	15	tzxo		ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί	1		Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles”
-GAL	2	15	tz45	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί	1	not Gentile sinners	The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and need God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	16	vduo	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	2	16	y3tl	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	2	16	xhx3	figs-activepassive	δικαιοῦται & δικαιωθῶμεν & δικαιωθήσεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	2	16	s2ys	figs-possession	ἔργων νόμου	-1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe what types of **works** he is referring to. He is specifically referring to works of the Mosaic law. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses … doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses … doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses” or “doing the things Moses commanded … doing the things Moses commanded … doing the things Moses commanded” or “doing the things commanded in the law of Moses … doing the things commanded in the law of Moses … doing the things commanded in the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	2	16	purc	figs-abstractnouns	ἔργων νόμου	-1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys” or “obey”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	16	ncnt	grammar-connect-exceptions	ἐὰν μὴ	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “but rather only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-GAL	2	16	iivr	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	-1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	16	q4iw	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & δικαιωθῶμεν	1		When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	2	16	nzcb	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	2	16	gp4w	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ	1		Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason why Cephas and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**. They **believed in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	2	16	j7g5	figs-synecdoche	σάρξ	1	no flesh	The word **flesh** refers to human beings. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-GAL	2	16	ctbj	figs-extrainfo	οὐ & ἄνθρωπος & πᾶσα σάρξ	1	no flesh	Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people and refer to people of all ages and nationalities. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases when translating the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people of all ages and nationalities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-GAL	2	17	gf9q	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	2	17	gtu7	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-GAL	2	17	vnp6	figs-explicit	ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ	1	while we seek to be justified in Christ	The phrase **justified in Christ** means made righteous in God’s sight because of being united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	17	m0tl	figs-activepassive	δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for God to justify us through our faith in Christ” or “for God to justify us because of our faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	2	17	s2r8	figs-exclusive	εὑρέθημεν	1		When Paul says **we** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	2	17	mg0h	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ	1		Paul uses the word **ourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-GAL	2	17	ph83	figs-activepassive	εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	2	17	c1op	figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτωλοί & ἁμαρτίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being a sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	17	qw76	figs-rquestion	ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος	1		The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	2	17	yy9s		μὴ γένοιτο	1	Absolutely not!	The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!”
-GAL	2	18	mwuo	figs-metaphor	ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ, παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω	1		Paul speaks of no longer thinking it is necessary to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying the law of Moses. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to going back again to acting like, and teaching, that it is necessary to keep the laws of Moses. Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the laws of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	2	18	o7g8	figs-abstractnouns	παραβάτην	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	19	wdaa	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** is introducing the reason that Paul said **May it never be” in [2:17](../02/17.md) and and also introducing information which gives support for what he said in [2:18](../02/18.md). Use a natural form for introducing a reason for something that was said prior. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	2	19	zqqw		διὰ νόμου	1		Alternate translation: “by means of the law”
-GAL	2	19	r55d	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & νόμῳ ἀπέθανον	1		Here, the phrase, **I … died to the law** could: (1) be a metaphor that refers to believers’ vicarious death with Christ through their believing in him and their consequent union with him which they as a result of their faith in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. (See [Rom 7:4](../07/04.md) and [Gal 4:4-5](../04/04.md)) Alternate translation: “I … died to the law through my union with Christ” (2) be a metaphor that refers to Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law. Alternate translation: “I … died to the law through the things that it required” or “I … died to the law through the things that it commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	2	19	yl7y	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose or reason for which he **died to the law**. The purpose was **so that** he **might live to God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	2	19	l3r9	figs-explicit	Θεῷ ζήσω	1		The phrase **live to God** means “live for God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I might live for God” or “I might live to serve God” or “I might live to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	19	xg5q	figs-metaphor	Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι	1		The phrase **I have been crucified with Christ** is a metaphor. Paul is not saying that he literally died with Christ. Paul is using this metaphor to express the reality that as a result of his faith in Christ, and the subsequent union with Christ that his faith has brought about, God now views Paul as if he had died with Christ. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **crucified with Christ** in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	2	19	fh2i	figs-activepassive	Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “the law” was the reason Christ had to be but to death. Roman soldiers put Jesus to death, but in context Paul is explaining that it was because of the requirements of “the law” that put Christ to died. If you must state the action you could explain this in your translation as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	2	20	o3jk	figs-metaphor	ζῶ & οὐκέτι ἐγώ, ζῇ δὲ ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός	1		Here, the phrase **I no longer live, but Christ lives in me** is a metaphor. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or you could express the meaning plainly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	2	20	y2qf	figs-ellipsis	ὃ & νῦν ζῶ	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	2	20	rtmc	figs-synecdoche	ὃ & νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί	1		Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-GAL	2	20	a4j0	figs-explicit	ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he now lives his life by means of having faith in God’s Son. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “I live by having faith in God’s Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	20	bb2x	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**the Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-GAL	2	20	m55w	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντός με	1		The phrase **the one** refers to **the Son of God**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who is the one having loved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	20	by5a	figs-explicit	παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν	1		The phrase **having given himself** means that Jesus gave himself as a sacrifice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	21	tj6l	figs-litotes	οὐκ ἀθετῶ	1	I do not set aside	Here, Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **do not**, together with a phrase, **set aside** that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I strongly affirm” or “I do uphold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-GAL	2	21	xvoq		οὐκ ἀθετῶ	1		Alternate translation: “I do not ignore” or “I do not dismiss”
-GAL	2	21	g5b8	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	21	ogus	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “righteous”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	2	21	yl3c	figs-hypo	εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν	1	if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses. Also, Paul knows that Christ died for a definite purpose. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. If your language does state things as a hypothetical possibility that the speaker is trying to prove false then use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-GAL	2	21	imxg	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν	1	if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Use a natural way in your language for expressing conditional “if … then” constructions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-GAL	2	21	m74u	figs-explicit	εἰ & διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη	1		Here, the word **through** expresses the means by which something happens. The phrase **if righteousness is through the law** means “if righteousness could be obtained through keeping the law.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if righteousness could be obtained by keeping the law” or “if a person could be justified by keeping the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	2	21	dv5f		διὰ νόμου	1		The phrase **through the law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of the law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md).
-GAL	2	21	rku5		ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν	1	then Christ died for nothing	Alternate translation: “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” or “then it was pointless for Christ to die”
-GAL	3	intro	xd92			0		# Galatians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Equality in Christ<br><br>All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical Questions<br><br>Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Flesh<br>This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter in contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])<br><br>### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”<br>Bible scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit all of the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	1	u6lo	figs-exclamations	ὦ	1		**O** is an exclamation word. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language that would be natural to use in this context. Alternate translation: “Oh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-GAL	3	1	xvji		ἀνόητοι Γαλάται	1		Alternate translation: “you Galatians are without understanding” or “you Galatians who are without understanding”
-GAL	3	1	p7uw	figs-rquestion	τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν	1	General Information:	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	1	ryu7	figs-irony	τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν	1	Who has put a spell on you?	Paul is using irony to express the fact that the Galatian believers are acting as though someone has put a spell on them. He does not really believe that someone has put a spell on them. In fact Paul is upset with the Galatians believers for willingly choosing to believe false teachers and letting themselves be deceived. If your readers would misunderstand what Paul is saying here, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You behave as if someone has put a spell on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
-GAL	3	1	gwv2	figs-metaphor	οἷς κατ’ ὀφθαλμοὺς Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος	1	It was before your eyes that Jesus Christ was publicly displayed as crucified	This phrase is a metaphor which could: (1) be referring to someone publicly drawing a picture for people to see. In this case Paul would be referring to the teaching about Jesus that the Galatians had received as if it were a clear picture that they had seen with their eyes. If your readers would not understand what **publicly portrayed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you yourselves heard the clear teaching about Jesus being crucified” (2) be referring to the practice of someone posting a public announcement for people to read. In this case Paul would be referring to his preaching the good news about Jesus as if it were a public announcement which the Galatians had read. If your readers would not understand what **publicly portrayed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you yourselves heard the clear teaching about Jesus being crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	1	ty3a	figs-activepassive	προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	2	wq9g	figs-rquestion	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐλάβετε, ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	Did you receive the Spirit by the works of the law or by believing what you heard?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “You received the Spirit, not by doing what the law says, but by believing what you heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	2	wll8		Πνεῦμα	1		The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you use a word that would be appropriate to use for the Holy Spirit.
-GAL	3	2	dbp8	figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1		See how you translated the phrase **by works of the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs three times. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	3	2	cfj2	figs-possession	ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1		Paul is using the possessive form here to describe the response that the Galatians had when they heard the preaching of the gospel which was to respond to it with **faith**. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “by believing what you heard” or “by hearing with faith” or “by trusting in the Messiah when you heard the message about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	3	3	f96u	figs-rquestion	οὕτως ἀνόητοί ἐστε	1	Are you so foolish?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to emphatically show his surprise. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “You are very foolish!” or “Don’t be so foolish!” or “Surely you cannot be so foolish!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	3	kkg7		οὕτως	1		Here, the word **so** adds magnitude to (amplifies) the word **foolish** and also points forward to what comes after the word **foolish**. Use a natural form in your language for indicating this.
-GAL	3	3	nghz		ἀνόητοί	1		See how you translated the word ** foolish** in [3:1](../03/01.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
-GAL	3	3	vof3	figs-rquestion	ἐναρξάμενοι Πνεύματι, νῦν σαρκὶ ἐπιτελεῖσθε	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to try to make the Galatian believers think about what they are doing. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	3	croz	figs-ellipsis	ἐναρξάμενοι	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Having begun the Christian life” or “Having begun your new relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	3	3	xff5		Πνεύματι	1		The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit.
-GAL	3	3	xu4d	figs-metonymy	σαρκὶ	1	by the flesh	Paul is describing the actions a person does while in their body by association with their body, which he calls **flesh**. Here, **flesh** refers to a reliance on one’s own effort in doing outward deeds and doing these actions with a self-sufficient and self-reliant trust in them instead of trusting God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “by your own effort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	3	4	iyj1	figs-rquestion	τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ	1	Have you suffered so many things for nothing & ?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to try to make the Galatian believers think about the implications of believing and following the false teachers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	4	xujz	figs-extrainfo	τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ	1		The original word that Paul used which is translated as **experienced** by the ULT could refer to: (1) the spiritual privileges and blessings that the Galatian believers had experienced such as receiving God’s Spirit when they believed in Jesus and God “working miracles” among them, both of which are mentioned in the next verse. If your language does not allow you to use a neutral term but rather requires a more specific term you could specify that the things the Galatians experienced were good things as modeled by the UST. (2) experiencing bad things such as suffering. If this is what Paul means here, then he is referring to the suffering that the Galatians believers experienced when they were persecuted. Alternate translation: “Keep in mind that if what God has done for you was because of your obeying the laws that God gave to Moses and not because of trusting in Christ, did you not suffer many things needlessly? I certainly hope that you did not suffer like that needlessly” (3) both good things and bad things here and be referring to both the persecution that the Galatians had experienced and the spiritual blessings that they had experienced. Because it is not known for sure what type of things that Paul is referring to, if possible you should try to use a neutral term or expression. You could then translate this rhetorical question as the ULT does or with a similar neutral phrase such as “Did all the things that happened to you not cause you to think about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-GAL	3	4	mvad		ἐπάθετε	1		Alternate translation: “Did you experience”
-GAL	3	4	nq68		εἰκῇ & καὶ εἰκῇ	1	for nothing	Alternate translation: “uselessly … it was really uselessly” or “in vain … it was really in vain” or “for no purpose … it was really for no purpose”
-GAL	3	4	xl9l	figs-hypo	εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ	1	if indeed it was for nothing?	The phrase **if indeed it was really for nothing** shows contingency regarding his rhetorical question **Have you experienced so many things for nothing** and shows that Paul still has hope for the Galatians. Paul hopes that the Galatians will not make the **many things** that they have **experienced** be **for nothing** by following the false teachers who were teaching that it was necessary that they follow the laws of Moses such as circumcision and the dietary laws it required. Paul is making a hypothetical statement to help his readers recognize the serious implications of following the teachings of the false teachers instead of trusting in Jesus alone. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was really for nothing that you experienced so many things, but I hope with you that this is not the case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-GAL	3	4	mx8b	figs-rquestion	εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ	1	if indeed it was for nothing?	The phrase **if indeed it was really for nothing** is a rhetorical question. Paul is using the question form here to help the Galatians think about what he is saying and to show that he still has hope that they will not follow the teachings of the false teachers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	5	fuzy	figs-rquestion	ὁ οὖν ἐπιχορηγῶν ὑμῖν τὸ Πνεῦμα καὶ ἐνεργῶν δυνάμεις ἐν ὑμῖν, ἐξ ἔργων νόμου ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1		This entire verse is a rhetorical question. Paul is using the question form here to teach the Galatians a truth by engaging their reasoning. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “God who gives you his Spirit and does miracles among you does not do these things because you obey the law of Moses. Surely you must know that God gives you these blessings because you believed the good news about the Messiah when you heart it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	5	upx9	figs-explicit	ὁ	1		Here, the phrase **the one** refers to “God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	5	xoax		Πνεῦμα	1		The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit.
-GAL	3	5	qnkz	figs-possession	ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1		See how you translated the phrase **by hearing of faith** in [3:02](../03/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	3	5	s3bc	figs-rquestion	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	Does he … do so by the works of the law, or by hearing with faith?	Paul asks another rhetorical question to remind the Galatians how people receive the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	5	j4vz	figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	by the works of the law	See how you translated the phrase **by works of the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs three times. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	3	5	e17q	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	by hearing with faith	Your language may require that what the people heard and whom they trusted be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “because you heard the message and had faith in Jesus” or “because you listened to the message and trusted in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	6	ahy9	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καθὼς	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **Just as** indicates that what follows is connected to what precedes it, specifically [3:1-5](../03/01.md). The phrase **Just as** is also introducing new information. The new information that this phrase is introducing is the biblical example of Abraham. Use a form that would be appropriate in this context. Alternate translation: “Even as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	3	6	iv9t	figs-quotemarks	ἐπίστευσεν τῷ Θεῷ καὶ ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1		Here, Paul quotes Genesis 15:16. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with opening and closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning and end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-GAL	3	6	ohbw	figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God credited it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	6	ghuy	figs-explicit	ἐλογίσθη	1		Here, the word **it** refers to Abraham’s belief in God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God credited his belief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	6	f7sv	figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	it was credited to him as righteousness	See how you translated the word **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	7	i9x4	figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ἐκ πίστεως	1	those of faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	7	rh9q	figs-explicit	οἱ ἐκ πίστεως	1		Your language may require you to state the object of **faith**. Here, the phrase **by faith** is probably a shortened way of of saying “who by faith in Christ are trusting God to consider them righteous” or “who are trusting God to consider them righteous because they believe in Christ”. Here, the phrase **by faith** is equivalent or similar in meaning to the phrase “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs in the phrase “we also believed in Christ Jesus, so that we might be justified by faith in Christ”. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the ones who by faith in Christ are trusting God to consider them righteous” or “the ones who are trusting God to consider them righteous because they believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	7	kq1h	figs-metaphor	υἱοί & Ἀβραὰμ	1	children of Abraham	People who have faith in God, as Abraham did, are here spoken of as if they were Abraham’s **sons**. Paul does not mean that people who have faith in God are Abraham’s biological descendants but rather he is saying that they share a spiritual similarity to him because they believe in God, therefore Paul calls them **sons of Abraham**. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sons of Abraham** in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	7	pq0z	figs-gendernotations	υἱοί	1	υἱοί	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	3	8	vs1m	figs-personification	προϊδοῦσα & ἡ Γραφὴ, ὅτι ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοῖ τὰ ἔθνη ὁ Θεὸς, προευηγγελίσατο τῷ Ἀβραὰμ	1	foreseeing	Here, **the Scripture** is spoken of as though it were a person who could foresee **that God would justify the Gentiles by faith** and **preach the gospel**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	3	8	wws9	figs-extrainfo	ἡ Γραφὴ	1		Here, the phrase **the Scripture** could refer to: (1) The Scriptures as a whole, referring here to the entire Old Testament. If you are are using capitalization, or some other convention, to indicate when the words “Scripture” and “Scriptures” refer to the entirety of the collected writings of the Bible use that convention here. Here, “Scripture” would only refer to the Old Testament since the New Testament was still in the process of being written at this time. Most likely Paul is referring to the entire Old Testament when he says “the Scripture” here, and then when he quotes Genesis 12:3 at the end of this verse he is giving a specific example of a passage within the Old Testament that teaches **that God would justify the Gentiles by faith**. (2) just the specific scripture reference which is cited at the end of this verse, Genesis 12:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-GAL	3	8	htbq	figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1		If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the object of **faith** explicitly. Alternate translation: “by their faith in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	8	ojbm	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”. Alternate translation: “by their believing in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	8	f6ly	writing-quotations	προευηγγελίσατο τῷ Ἀβραὰμ	1		The sentence **In you all the nations will be blessed** is a quotation from Genesis 12:3. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “preached the gospel beforehand to Abraham where it is written” or “preached the gospel beforehand to Abraham when Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-GAL	3	8	j83j	figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1	all the nations	Here, the term **nations** refers to the people who make up these **nations**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people from all the nations” or “people from every nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	3	8	qf98	figs-activepassive	ἐνευλογηθήσονται ἐν σοὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “In you God will bless all the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	9	ss1b		ὥστε	1		Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Consequently”
-GAL	3	9	l1bq		οἱ ἐκ πίστεως	1		See how you translated the phrase **the ones by faith** in [3:7](../03/7.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
-GAL	3	9	m5ef	figs-activepassive	οἱ ἐκ πίστεως εὐλογοῦνται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones by faith are the ones that God will bless” or “the ones who believe are blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	10	r5bm	figs-explicit	ὅσοι & ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἰσὶν	1		Here, the phrase **as many as are of works of the law** is probably a shortened way of saying “as many as are relying on works of the law as the basis for God considering them to be righteous”. Here, the phrase **of works of the law** is similar in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs in the phrase “no man is justified by works of the law”. Here, the phrase **as many as are of works of the law** is describing people who rely on the **works of the law** and is in contrast to the phrase “the ones by faith” in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning explicitly here. Alternate translation: “as many as rely on the works of the law as the basis for being righteous before God” or “as many as are relying on works of the law as the basis for God considering them to be righteous” or “as many as are trusting that God will consider them righteous because they try to obey the Law of Moses” or “as many as are seeking for God to consider them righteous on the basis of following what the Mosaic Law commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	10	uz3y	figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1		
-GAL	3	10	fv3c	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται & γεγραμμένοις	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	10	mxe7		ὅσοι γὰρ ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	the works of the law	Alternate translation: “All people who follow the law” or “Everyone who tries to be justified through obeying the law”
-GAL	3	10	jhr2	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ κατάραν εἰσίν	1	All who rely on … the law are under a curse	Here, **under a curse** represents being cursed by God and refers to being condemned by God and therefore being doomed to eternal punishment. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “are cursed by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	10	bin9	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὸ κατάραν εἰσίν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **curse**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “curse”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	10	uj98	figs-explicit	γέγραπται	1		Here, Paul uses the phrase **it is written** to indicate that what follows is a quotation from the Old Testament Scriptures. Paul assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	11	zyvq	figs-activepassive	ἐν νόμῳ, οὐδεὶς δικαιοῦται παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God justifies no one by the law” or “God justifies no one as a result of their seeking to obey the Law of Moses” or “God justifies no person on the basis of doing what the Law of Moses commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	11	sn9h		δῆλον	1	Now it is clear	Alternate translation: “is evident”
-GAL	3	11	e2hj	writing-quotations	ὅτι	2		The sentence **The righteous will live by faith** is a quotation from Habakkuk 2:4. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations from an important or sacred text. Alternate translation: “because it is written in Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-GAL	3	11	qiab	writing-quotations	ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1		The sentence **The righteous will live by faith** is a quotation from Habakkuk 2:4. Use a natural way of indicating that something is a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-GAL	3	11	i537	figs-nominaladj	ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	the righteous will live by faith	Paul is citing the prophet Habakkuk who is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “People who are righteous will live by their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-GAL	3	11	h7t4		ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1		The phrase **by faith** could be connected to: (1) the phrase **will live** and be describing the ongoing means by which a righteous person has spiritual life, namely by their faith. Alternate translation: “The righteous person has life through their faith” or “The righteous person lives as a result of their faith” “The righteous person has spiritual life as a result of their faith” (2) the phrase **the righteous** and be describing the means by which God considers a sinful person to be **righteous*, namely by their having faith in him. Alternate translation: “The person who is made right with God as a result of their faith will live” or “Every person whose record of sins God erases because that person trusts God will live spiritually”
-GAL	3	11	osgj	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	the righteous will live by faith	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by believing” or “because they believe” or “by believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	11	e610	figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1		If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that the object of **faith** here is God. Alternate translation: “by believing in God” or “because they believe in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	12	jr9l	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		The word **Now** indicates that Paul is introducing new information into his argument and it also indicates that Paul is introducing information that will be in contrast with his statement in [3:11](../03/11.md), that “the law” is not able to justify a person. Use a natural form in your language for indicating these things. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	3	12	hr2x	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	12	r7i7	figs-explicit	ὁ & νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως	1		Here, the phrase **the law is not by faith** means that the Law of Moses is not based on faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the Law of Moses is not founded on faith” or “the Law of Moses is not dependent upon faith” or “when God gave his laws to the Jews he did not make them dependent upon a person believing in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	12	fml8	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		What follows the word **but** here is indicating a contrast between **law** and **faith**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	3	12	opyp	writing-quotations	ἀλλ’	1		The phrase **The one doing these things will live in them** is a quotation from Leviticus 18:5. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations from an important or sacred text. Alternate translation: “but as it is written in Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-GAL	3	12	khuu	figs-explicit	αὐτὰ	1		The phrase **these things” refers to God’s “statutes” and “laws” which are mentioned in the first part of Leviticus 18:5. Paul is citing the second half of Leviticus 18:5 here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly in your translation what “these things” refers to. Alternate translation: “these law and statutes of mine” or “my law and statutes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	12	rep5	figs-explicit	ζήσεται ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	must live by them	Here, the phrase **will live in them** means FILL or DELETE. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will live because of them” or “will because he obeyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	13	iql5	figs-metaphor	ἐξηγόρασεν	1		Paul uses the metaphor of a person buying back lost property or buying the freedom of a slave as a picture of God sending Jesus to pay for people’s sins by dying on the cross. If your readers would not understand what **redeem** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	13	ml63	figs-explicit	τῆς κατάρας & κατάρα	1	from the curse of the law	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **curse**, you could express the same idea with a verb phrase as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	13	vqc3	figs-metonymy	κατάρα	1		By using the phrase **a curse** Paul is describing a person who is cursed by God by association with the **curse** itself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “one who was cursed” or “one who was cursed by God” or “one who God cursed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	3	13	vaay		ὑπὲρ	1		Alternate translation: “for”
-GAL	3	13	p5m9		ὅτι γέγραπται	1		The phrase **for it is written** is introducing a quotation from Deuteronomy 21:23. See how you translated the phrase **for it is written** in [3:10](../03/10.md) where it is also introducing a quotation from Scripture.
-GAL	3	13	vjbr		ἐπικατάρατος πᾶς ὁ	1		See how you translated the phrase **Cursed is everyone** in [3:10](../03/10.md).
-GAL	3	13	mt6z	figs-explicit	ξύλου	1	hangs on a tree	In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the word **tree** can refer to a post made out of wood. Here, Paul is using this term to refer to the wooden cross that Jesus was crucified on. If it would help your readers, use a term which would be applicable to something made of wood and not merely to a live tree. Alternate translation: “a pole” or “a wooden pole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	14	brf7	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	so that the blessing of Abraham might come	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for Christ’s death (which he discussed in the previous verse). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	3	14	z38j	figs-abstractnouns	εὐλογία	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blessing**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “bless”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	14	a0nd	figs-explicit	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here, the word **in** could be used to indicate: (1) by what means **the blessing of Abraham** would **come to the Gentiles**, namely “by means of” **Christ Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of Christ Jesus” or “through Christ Jesus” or “by Christ Jesus” (2) the sphere in which **the blessing of Abraham** would **come to the Gentiles**, namely **so that the blessing of Abraham might come to the Gentiles** who are “in the sphere of” **Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “who are in union with Christ Jesus” (3) the reason **the blessing of Abraham** would ** come to the Gentiles**, namely “because of” **Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “because of what Christ Jesus has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	14	gt7z	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	2		Here, the phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for **the blessing of Abraham** coming **to the Gentiles**, namely so that **the promise of the Spirit** could be received **through faith**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	3	14	g87i		διὰ	1		Alternate translation: “by”
-GAL	3	14	agv5	figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1		Here, the object of **faith** is Christ. If it would help your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. The phrase **through faith** also occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md), where it has “Jesus Christ” as the object of the phrase “through faith”. Alternate translation: “through faith in Christ” or “through faith in the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	14	qsai	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	14	h46q	figs-exclusive	λάβωμεν	1	we	When Paul says **we** he is speaking of himself and the Galatian believers so **we** would be inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	3	14	ezpz	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promise**, you could express the same idea with a verb form such as “promised”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	14	vce3	figs-possession	ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Paul is using the possessive form to explain what the **promise** is regarding. Paul is using the possessive form to indicate that the **promise** he is referring to here is the promise regarding the coming Holy Spirit. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “promise regarding the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	3	14	l6oj		Πνεῦμα	1		The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit.
-GAL	3	15	al9b		ἀδελφοί	1	Brothers	See how you translated the term “brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “Brothers and sisters”
-GAL	3	15	c3gs	figs-explicit	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1	in human terms	Here, Paul uses the phrase **according to man** to means that he is speaking in accord with the manner of human practice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to human practice” or “with a human analogy from human legal practice” or “using an analogy from standard daily life”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	15	bfjq	figs-gendernotations	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to humans in general. If your readers would misunderstand this you can indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to human practice” or “using an analogy from standard human practice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	3	15	si56		ὅμως	1		Here, the word **Nevertheless** could be: (1) indicating a concession. Paul is admitting or conceding that the analogy from human legal affairs that he is about to use is imperfect, **Nevertheless** he is going to use it to illustrate a spiritual truth. (2) indicating a comparison. Alternate translation: “similarly” or “likewise”
-GAL	3	15	jrdg	figs-activepassive	ἀνθρώπου κεκυρωμένην	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which people have established” or “which men have established” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	15	rbir	figs-genericnoun	ἀνθρώπου κεκυρωμένην διαθήκην, οὐδεὶς ἀθετεῖ ἢ ἐπιδιατάσσεται	1		Paul is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “no one sets aside or adds to a covenant which people have established” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-GAL	3	15	zu16	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1		Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to people in general. If your readers would misunderstand this you can indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	3	16	f1xu	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now	Here, the word **Now** could indicate: (1) that Paul is introducing additional information into his ongoing argument. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” (2) a transition. Alternate translation: “But note that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	3	16	hdfm		ἐπαγγελίαι	1	Now	See how you translated the word “promise” in [3:14](../03/14.md).
-GAL	3	16	rreg	figs-metaphor	τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ & τοῖς σπέρμασιν & τῷ σπέρματί σου	1		Here, the term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If your readers would not understand what **seed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	16	x8m7		τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ & τοῖς σπέρμασιν & τῷ σπέρματί σου	1		In order to correctly communicate Paul’s meaning here it is important to translate both occurrences of the word **seed** with a singular form and to translate the single occurrence of the word **seeds** with a plural form that indicates more than one.
-GAL	3	16	j9x7	figs-explicit	οὐ λέγει	1		Here, the word **He** could: (1) refer to God speaking to Abraham. By using the phrase **and to your seed** Paul is referring to multiple passages in the book of Genesis where God made promises to Abraham and his **seed**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that **He** refers to the God. Alternate translation: “God does not say” (2) be translated as “It” and be referring to the various passages in Genesis which record that God spoke promises to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that **It** refers to Scripture. Alternate translation: “Scripture does not say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	16	w3wl	figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἐπὶ πολλῶν, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἐφ’ ἑνός	1	referring to many	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as speaking about many, but as speaking about one” or “as referring to many, but as referring to one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	3	16	t25e	figs-you	σου	1	to your descendant	The word **your** is singular and refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-GAL	3	17	pdd3		δὲ	1		Alternate translation: “And”
-GAL	3	17	h36m	translate-numbers	τετρακόσια καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη	1	430 years	Alternate translation: “four hundred and thirty years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-GAL	3	17	v3gq		διαθήκην	1		See how you translated the word “covenant” in [3:15](../03/15.md).
-GAL	3	17	qn7j	figs-activepassive	προκεκυρωμένην ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which God established previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	17	fmw4	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ καταργῆσαι	1		Here, the word **to** introduces what the result would have been if **the law** had **set aside the covenant previously established by God**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “so as to nullify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	3	17	ydsw		ἐπαγγελίαν	1		See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
-GAL	3	18	ujg2		εἰ & ἐκ & ἡ κληρονομία, οὐκέτι ἐξ	1	For if the inheritance comes by the law, then it no longer comes by promise	Alternate translation: “if the inheritance is from … then it is no longer from”
-GAL	3	18	c8fu	figs-metaphor	ἡ κληρονομία	1	inheritance	Paul speaks of God’s blessings to those who believe in him as if they were an **inheritance**. If your readers would not understand what **inheritance** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the blessing” or “God’s blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	18	h1xv	figs-explicit	ἐκ νόμου & οὐκέτι ἐξ	1		Alternate translation: “is by the law, it is no longer by” or “is based on the law, it is no longer based on” or “comes from the law, it no longer comes from”
-GAL	3	18	pe31		ἐπαγγελίας & ἐπαγγελίας	1		See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
-GAL	3	18	q6jq	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to the idea that **the inheritance is from the law**. Instead, Paul points out that **the inheritance** is based on God’s promise. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	3	18	xsep	figs-explicit	κεχάρισται	1		Here, the word **it** refers to **the inheritance** mentioned earlier in this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “has graciously given the inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	18	ue27		δι’	1		Here, the word **through** is indicating means and is introducing the means through which God gave **the inheritance … to Abraham**, namely **through a promise**. Use a natural form in your language for indicating the means by which something happens.
-GAL	3	19	kx2e	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ὁ νόμος	1	What, then, was the purpose of the law?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to anticipate a question that the Galatian believers might have regarding the purpose of the law and to introduce his answer to this anticipated question. If it would help your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you what the purpose of the law is” or “Let me tell you why God added the law to the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	19	mnw2	figs-ellipsis	ὁ νόμος	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “was the law given” or “did God give the law” or “was the law added” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	3	19	uk9m	figs-activepassive	προσετέθη	1	It was added	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God added it” or “God added the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	19	yf5t		τῶν παραβάσεων χάριν προσετέθη	1		The phrase **because of transgressions** could refer to: (1) the purpose that **the law … was added** to the covenant with Abraham, namely the law **was added** to the covenant “for the purpose of showing what transgression is” or “for the purpose of showing people what sin is”. The phrase **because of transgressions** would then be stating the purpose that **the law … was added**, namely because people were sinning and God wanted show them what sin was by giving **the law**. Alternate translation: “It was added for the purpose of showing what transgression is” or “It was added for the purpose of showing people what sin is” (2) what caused God to decide that **the law** should be **added** to the covenant with Abraham. This phrase would then mean that what caused God to add **the law** to the covenant was because people were committing transgressions. The phrase **because of transgressions** would then be stating the cause for **the law** being **added**, namely because people were sinning and God wanted to correct people’s wrong and sinful behavior by showing them what righteous behavior was and so he gave **the law**. Alternate translation: “It was added because people were committing transgressions” or “It was added because people were sinning”
-GAL	3	19	phd5	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν παραβάσεων	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **transgressions**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “sinful”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	19	cf66	figs-activepassive	διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων	1	The law was put into force through angels by a mediator	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “and God used angels to put it into effect” or “God gave the law through angels” or “God put the law into effect through angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	19	lxcw		διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων	1		Translate the phrase **through angels** in a way that indicates that God was the source of the law and not angels. God was the source of the law but he used angels to give the law Moses. The Bible records in Deuteronomy 33:2; Hebrews 2:2; and Acts 7:38, 53 that God used angels to give Moses his law and this is what Jewish people believed regarding how God delivered his law to Moses. Alternate translation: “and God used angels to put it into effect” or “God gave the law through angels” or “God put the law into effect through angels”
-GAL	3	19	v74y		ἄχρις οὗ ἔλθῃ τὸ σπέρμα ᾧ ἐπήγγελται, διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων ἐν χειρὶ μεσίτου	1		When Paul says that **the law** was administered **by the hand of a mediator (Moses) until the seed would come to whom the promise had been made** his point is that **the law** was temporary and only needed **until the seed (Christ) would come**. By saying this, Paul is implicitly telling the Galatian believers that the law was temporary, and only needed until Christ, whom he calls **the seed**, came.
-GAL	3	19	bgi6	figs-idiom	ἐν χειρὶ μεσίτου	1	a mediator	The phrase **by the hand of** is an idiom which means “through.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “through a mediator” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	3	19	edcu	figs-explicit	μεσίτου	1	a mediator	Here, the **mediator** that Paul is referring to is Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of Moses who acted as a mediator” or “of Moses who acted as a go-between” or “of Moses who acted as an intermediary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	19	m67a		σπέρμα	1		See how you translated the word **seed** in [3:16](../03/16.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
-GAL	3	19	hrzb		ἐπήγγελται	1		See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
-GAL	3	19	nl4h	figs-activepassive	ἐπήγγελται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God had made the promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	20	x9l1		ὁ δὲ μεσίτης ἑνὸς οὐκ ἔστιν	1	Now a mediator implies more than one person, but God is one	In this verse Paul is proving to the Galatian believers that God’s promise to Abraham is superior to the law that he gave Moses. What Paul means by saying **a mediator is not for one** is that a mediator is not needed when one person is speaking with another person directly. Paul is implicitly expressing to the Galatian believers that the promise to Abraham is superior to the law because it was not given through a mediator but rather God gave the promise directly to Abraham. If it would help your readers you could indicate that in a footnote if you are using footnotes in your translation. See the Chapter 3 General Notes section “Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter” for more information regarding this section.
-GAL	3	20	pqtm		μεσίτης	1		See how you translated the term **mediator** in [3:19](../03/19.md).
-GAL	3	20	y3ix	figs-explicit	ἑνὸς	1		The phrase **for one** leaves the object implied. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what **one** is referring to. Alternate translation: “for one party alone” or “needed for one party” or “needed when there is only one party involved” or “is not needed as a go-between when only one party is involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	20	lhui	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	2		What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to the opening statement in this verse that **a mediator is not for one**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	3	20	l2b6	figs-explicit	δὲ	2		Here, the phrase **God is one** is a quote from Deuteronomy 6:4 which the Galatians believers would have been familiar with. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that the phrase **God is one** is cited from Scripture. Alternate translation: “but as God has said in Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	20	cle8		Θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν	1		There are many different views among Bible scholars as to exactly what Paul means by using the phrase **God is one** here and how it is related to the phrase **a mediator is not for one** earlier in the verse. The most likely interpretation is that expressed by the UST. See the Chapter 3 General Notes section “Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter” for more information regarding this section.
-GAL	3	21	zwk0	figs-rquestion	ὁ & νόμος κατὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to anticipate a question that the Galatian believers might have and to introduce his answer to the question which begins with the phrase **if a was given being able to make alive...** If it would help your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “you might think that the law is against the promises” or “you might think that the law is opposed to the promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	3	21	e43u		κατὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν	1	against the promises	Alternate translation: “opposed to the promises” or “in conflict with the promises”
-GAL	3	21	ee7y	figs-explicit	τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν	1		The phrase **the promises** refers to the promises that God made to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promises that God made to Abraham” or “God’s promises to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	21	q7su		ἐπαγγελιῶν	1		See how you translated the word “promise” in [3:14](../03/14.md).
-GAL	3	21	nd97		μὴ γένοιτο	1		**May it never be** is an emphatic way of negating a statement. The statement that the phrase **May it never be** is negating is the proposed question **is the law against the promises**. Use a natural word or expression for strongly negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Certainly not!”
-GAL	3	21	jnwe	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἐδόθη νόμος ὁ δυνάμενος ζῳοποιῆσαι, ὄντως	1		Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Alternate translation: “if it was possible that a law was given that was able to make people alive, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-GAL	3	21	bjpb	figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη νόμος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God gave a law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	21	dljp	figs-explicit	ζῳοποιῆσαι	1		Here, it is implied that Paul is referring to making “people” alive. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to make people alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	21	skc0	figs-extrainfo	ζῳοποιῆσαι	1		The phrase **to make alive** could refer to: (1) both eternal life in the future and to making people spiritually alive in the present. Paul is probably referring to both here since in this letter Paul discusses the important role of the Holy Spirit and the fact that the Holy Spirit is given through faith and not the law. (2) eternal life in the future after a person dies. If it is possible in your language, it would be best to retain a general phrase as modeled by the ULT, since Paul does not explain the phrase **to make alive**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-GAL	3	21	nebi	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δικαιοσύνη	1		See how you translated the word **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	21	iyg9		ἐν νόμου ἂν ἦν ἡ δικαιοσύνη	1	righteousness would certainly have come by the law	Alternate translation: “we could have become righteous by obeying that law”
-GAL	3	22	smkw	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here, the word **But** is indicating a strong contrast between the hypothetical (and false) possibility that “the law” could make a person righteous. Paul is using the word **But** here to indicate this strong contrast and to introduce his explanation of what the law actually does. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	3	22	yzcp	figs-metaphor	συνέκλεισεν ἡ Γραφὴ τὰ πάντα ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν	1		Paul speaks of **the Scripture** as though it were an authority figure who **imprisoned** people in a prison and he speaks of **sin** as though it were a jailer who keeps people imprisoned so that they cannot break free. If your readers would not understand what **imprisoned all things under sin** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	22	upkg	figs-personification	συνέκλεισεν ἡ Γραφὴ τὰ πάντα ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν	1		Here, Paul speaks of **the Scripture** as though it were a person who is an authority figure who **imprisoned** people in a prison and he speaks of **sin** as though it were a jailer who keeps people imprisoned so that they cannot break free. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	3	22	jbn7	figs-metonymy	ἡ Γραφὴ	1	scripture	Here, the word **Scripture** could: (1) refer to all of the Old Testament scriptures. Use whatever convention you are using to indicate this. The ULT indicates when the word **Scripture** refers to the entire Bible, or the entire Old Testament, by capitalizing the word **Scripture**. (2) refer to a particular passage of Scripture such as Deuteronomy 27:26 or some other Old Testament passage. Alternate translation: “the scripture”
-GAL	3	22	dxqc	figs-metonymy	ἡ Γραφὴ	1		Paul is describing “God” doing something by association with his Word, **the Scripture**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	3	22	mk9g	figs-explicit	τὰ πάντα	1		Here, the phrase **all things* could refer to: (1) all people. If your language requires you to indicate explicitly what **all things** refers to, you could indicate that it refers to “people,” but if it doesn’t you could use a general expression as modeled by the ULT. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) the entire creation and the things which make up this present fallen world. See Romans 8:18-22. If you decide that this is what Paul means you should use a general phrase such as **all things** as the ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-GAL	3	22	dt14	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν	1		Here, the phrase **under sin** refers to being “under the power of sin.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the power of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	22	xqmi	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Following the phrase **so that** Paul states the purpose for which **the Scripture imprisoned all things under sin**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	3	22	pvv3	figs-activepassive	ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοθῇ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might give the promise by faith in Jesus Christ to the ones believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	22	o9ap		ἐπαγγελία	1		See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
-GAL	3	22	elb4		ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοθῇ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1		Alternate translation: “God’s promise to Abraham which is received through faith in Jesus Christ might be given to the those who believe”
-GAL	3	22	ib27	figs-explicit	ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1		The phrase **the promise** refers to the promise given to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise given to Abraham” or “the promise that God gave to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	22	jyvn		ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		See how you translated the phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). The phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md) has basically the exact same meaning as the phrase **by faith in Jesus Christ** does in this verse.
-GAL	3	22	bo1b	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	23	jzut	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πίστιν & τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trusting” or “believe”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	23	ztcj	figs-explicit	πρὸ τοῦ & ἐλθεῖν τὴν πίστιν	1		The phrase **before the faith came** means “before faith in Jesus Christ came.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “before faith in Jesus Christ came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	23	su16	figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα, συνκλειόμενοι	1	we were held captive under the law, imprisoned	Here, Paul is continuing the metaphor of **the law** that he began in the previous verse. The power that **the law** had over humans us is spoken of as if the law were a prison guard holding people captive. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **held captive** by the law in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	23	aue6	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ	1	under	Here, the word **under** means “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	23	r5y3	figs-personification	ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα, συνκλειόμενοι	1		Here, Paul is continuing his personification of **the law** that he began in the previous verse. Paul speaks of **the law** as though it were a jailer who **held** people **captive** and kept them **imprisoned** up **until** the time when the coming **faith** in Jesus Christ would **be revealed**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	3	23	e729	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law held us captive under its power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	23	xmur	figs-activepassive	συνκλειόμενοι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the first half of the verse states that **the law** did it. Alternate translation: “and the law imprisoned us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	23	way9		εἰς τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1		Here, the word **until** could: (1) refer to time and introduce the time period at which people being **imprisoned** under the law would terminate, namely **until** the time when God would reveal Jesus Christ as an object of faith. Alternate translation: “until God would reveal the message about trusting in Christ that he was about to reveal” (2) be translated as “to” and be indicating the purpose for people being **imprisoned** under the law, namely so that people would be ready for the coming faith in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “in order to lead us to believe in the good news that God was about to reveal” or “in order that we might be ready to believe the good news concerning Christ, the news that God would reveal later”
-GAL	3	23	rz75	figs-explicit	τὴν & πίστιν	2		The phrase **the faith** means “the faith in Jesus Christ.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the faith in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	23	t32j	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	until faith should be revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “until the faith that God was about to reveal” or “until the faith that God would soon reveal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	24	we2y	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	guardian	Here, the phrase **So then** is introducing a result. Use a natural form for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “Thus” or “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	3	24	mcdn	figs-metaphor	ὁ νόμος, παιδαγωγὸς ἡμῶν γέγονεν	1		Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a **guardian**. If your readers would not understand what a **guardian** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning by using a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	24	amrv	translate-unknown	παιδαγωγὸς	1	guardian	In Paul’s culture a **guardian** was a slave whose job was to discipline and take care of a child who was not yet an adult. If your readers would not be familiar with this term you could either explain the meaning of this word in your translation, as modeled by the UST, or you could use the term from your culture that comes the closes to expressing the meaning of this word and then write a footnote explaining this word if you are using footnotes in your translation. Alternate translation: “custodian” or “guide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-GAL	3	24	ln1s	figs-personification	παιδαγωγὸς	1	guardian	Here, Paul speaks of **the law** as though it were a **guardian** whose job or role was to watch over people’s actions **until Christ** came. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “guide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	3	24	p30v		εἰς	1		See how you translated the word **until** in [3:23](../03/23.md).
-GAL	3	24	zick	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which **the law became our guardian until Christ** which was for the intended purpose that **we might be justified by faith** in Christ. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “with the purpose that” or “with the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	3	24	s8g5	figs-activepassive	δικαιωθῶμεν	1	so that we might be justified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God would declare us to be righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	24	j1xp		ἐκ πίστεως	1		See how you translated the phrase **by faith** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
-GAL	3	24	vj5u	figs-explicit	ἐκ	1		Here, the word **by** is indicating the basis or source of God’s act of justifying sinners. It is indicating that **faith** is the basis on which **we might be justfied.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of” or “by means of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	24	kw1h	figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	24	wuco	figs-explicit	πίστεως	1		Here, the context implies (and also Paul’s use of the similar phrase “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md)), that the object of **faith** is **Christ**. If it would be helpful to your readers to state the object of faith here, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	25	x257	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast. What follows the word **But** is in contrast to the way things were in the era before Christ came. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	3	25	a4pk	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trusting”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	25	meot	figs-explicit	τῆς πίστεως	1		Here, the context implies that the object of **faith** is “Christ.” If it would be helpful to your readers to state the object of faith here, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	25	efvh	figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ παιδαγωγόν	1		Here, Paul continues the metaphor he began in [3:24](../03/24.md) by continuing to speak of “the law” as if it were a **guardian**. If your readers would not understand what the term **guardian** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	25	be13	figs-personification	ὑπὸ παιδαγωγόν	1		Here, Paul speaking of “the law” as though it were a person who was a **guardian**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	3	25	kjvy	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ	1		Here, the word **under** means “under the supervision of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the supervision of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	25	gwst		παιδαγωγόν	1		See how you translated the word **guardian** in [3:24](../03/24.md).
-GAL	3	26	tzqa	figs-gendernotations	υἱοὶ	1		Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women who have **faith in Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “sons and daughters” of “children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	3	26	u0ma	figs-metaphor	υἱοὶ	1		Paul speaks of the Galatian believers as if God was their biological, physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	26	mwku	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trusted,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	3	26	kht6		ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		The phrase **in Christ Jesus** could mean: (1) that the spiritual position of the Galatian believers was “in Christ Jesus.” Alternate translation: “being in union with Christ Jesus” or “you are in union with Christ Jesus” (2) that **Christ Jesus** was the object of Galatian believers faith. Alternate translation: “which is in Christ Jesus” or “towards Christ Jesus”
-GAL	3	27	p0dy	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** indicates that what follows is an explanation giving the reason for why Paul said “you are all sons of God” in [3:26](../03/26.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing information which proves and/or explains a prior statement. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	3	27	yicn	figs-explicit	ὅσοι	1		The phrase **as many as** means “as many of you as.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many of you as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	27	h5ax	figs-explicit	ὅσοι & ἐβαπτίσθητε	1		The phrase **as many as have** means “all of you who have.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all of you who have been baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	27	v6n1	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	For as many of you who were baptized into Christ	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “a person” did it. Alternate translation: “someone has baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	3	27	ucuk	figs-metaphor	εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	For as many of you who were baptized into Christ	Paul speaks of being **baptized into Christ** as if **Christ** were a physical location into which someone could be baptized. Here, **into Christ** refers to being spiritually united with Christ and coming into close spiritual union with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of this phrase plainly. Alternative translation: “have been baptized into close spiritual union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	27	dgkv	figs-metonymy	εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε, Χριστὸν ἐνεδύσασθε	1	For as many of you who were baptized into Christ	By speaking of baptism, Paul could be describing all of the things which belong to a believers initial conversion experience. Paul would then be associating all of them with one part of their conversion experience, water baptism, in which case baptism is an abbreviated way of referring conversion and the things that are part of it such as belief in Christ, baptism, and receiving Holy Spirit. If you decide that this is what Paul means here, and if it would help your readers, you could indicate this explicitly or you could explain this in a footnote if you are using them. Alternate translation: “God has saved have put on Christ” or “have believed in Christ have put on Christ” or “have experienced God’s salvation have put on Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	3	27	di9v	figs-metaphor	Χριστὸν ἐνεδύσασθε	1	have clothed yourselves with Christ	Paul speaks of **Christ** as if he were clothing that those who believe in him have **put on**. Here, when Paul says that all believers have **put on Christ** he means that all believers have identified with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of this phrase plainly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	28	srk1	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐκ ἔνι Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ, πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς εἷς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here, the word **for** introduces the reason for why (if someone is a believer in Christ) it is as if there is no longer **Jew nor Greek** or **slave** or **free** or **male** or **female**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase (which follows the word **for**) gives the reason for the result that the first part of this verse describes. Alternate translation: “Because you are all one in Christ Jesus, there is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither slave nor free, there is neither male nor female” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	3	28	tu05	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔνι Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ, πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς εἷς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		In this verse, Paul’s point is that people who believe in Christ are no longer divided by racial, social, or gender distinctions but rather now have **one** common identity. This new common identity is that they are now **in (union with) Christ**. Paul is not saying that these human distinction no longer exist, rather he is saying that they now cease to be significant because believers have a new spiritual identity, which is being **in Christ**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “For you who are believers, it is now as if there is neither Jew nor Greek, or slave or free, or male or female” or “For you who believe in Christ, it is now as if there is neither Jew nor Greek, or slave or free, or male or female” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	28	aonk	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ & Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ	1		If your readers would misunderstand these double negatives, you could translate each double negative using only one negative word. Alternate translation: “neither Jew or Greek, there is neither slave or free, there is neither male or female” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-GAL	3	28	zxfp	figs-explicit	Ἕλλην	1		Here, the term **Greek** refers to non-Jewish people. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece or to people who speak the Greek language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	28	pfrh	figs-explicit	ἐλεύθερος	1		Here, the term **free** refers to people who are not slaves and thus are free from bondage to a master. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “free person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	28	fy09		γὰρ	1		Here, the word **for** introduces a reason. Use a natural form for introducing the reason for something that was said previously. Alternate translation: “because”
-GAL	3	28	fakq		πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς εἷς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Alternate translation: “because all of you are together joined to the Messiah Jesus”
-GAL	3	28	mppd	figs-explicit	εἷς	1		Here, Paul uses the word **one** to indicate that all believers share the same equal position because of their new identity which they have by being **in Christ**. (Paul is further explaining his statement from the previous verse in which he says that all believers have “put on Christ”, meaning that they have a new and common identity which is derived from and centers on Christ). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what **one** means here. Alternate translation: “one person” or “one and the same standing” or “of equal standing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	28	pddu	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul speaks of believers being **in Christ Jesus** as if **Christ Jesus** were a physical location into which someone could be. Here, **into Christ** refers to being spiritually united with Christ in a close spiritual union. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of this phrase plainly. Alternative translation: “have been baptized into close spiritual union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	29	lnlp	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, Paul is using the word **Now** to introduce new information. Use a natural form for introducing new information. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	3	29	ovzy	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἄρα	1		Paul is using an **if … then” statement to express a hypothetical condition and what the result is for those people who meet the requirement of the condition. Paul is telling the Galatians that **if** they belong to Christ **then** they are Abrahams spiritual descendents. Use a natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical condition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-GAL	3	29	lth0	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς & ἐστέ	1		Here, both occurrences of the word **you** are plural and refer to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark these forms as plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-GAL	3	29	wceh		ὑμεῖς Χριστοῦ	1		Alternate translation: “you are Christ’s” or “you belong to Christ”
-GAL	3	29	xwrj	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1		Here, the term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If your readers would not understand what **seed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. See how you translated the word **seed** in [3:16](../03/16.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	29	qp4z	figs-metaphor	κληρονόμοι	1	heirs	Paul speaks of believers, who are the spiritual descendants **of Abraham**, as if they were **heirs** who were to inherit property and wealth from a family member. If your readers would not understand what **heirs** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	3	29	au7a	figs-explicit	κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν κληρονόμοι	1	heirs	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what the **heirs** will inherit. Alternate translation: “heirs of what God promised to Abraham and his descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	3	29	zxr0		κατ’	1		Alternate translation: “by way of”
-GAL	3	29	cu6z		ἐπαγγελίαν	1		See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
-GAL	4	intro	h6gw			0		# Galatians 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Sonship<br><br>Sonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel’s sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham’s physical descendants inherited God’s promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them “children of promise.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Abba, Father<br>“Abba” is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul “transliterates” its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-GAL	4	1	fr5u		κληρονόμος	1	Connecting Statement:	See how you translated the plural form of this word in [3:29](../03/29.md).
-GAL	4	1	vlu6		κύριος πάντων ὤν	1		Alternate translation: “though being master of all things” or “even though he is master of all things” or “even though he is the master of all the things he is going to inherit”
-GAL	4	2	eyfx	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast and indicating that what follows is in contrast to what came before it in the preceding verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	4	2	jtpo	figs-explicit	ἐστὶ	1		Here, the word **he** refers to “the heir” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heir is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	2	ppf1	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ	1		Here, the word **under** means “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	2	llwi	figs-explicit	ἐπιτρόπους & καὶ οἰκονόμους	1		The terms **guardians** and **stewards** refer to two different roles but these terms do not necessarily refer to two different groups of people since one person could have responsibility for filling both roles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “someone who is his guardian and steward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	2	bd5a	translate-unknown	ἐπιτρόπους	1	guardians	A guardian was a person who had the role of being responsible for a child. This person’s job was to supervise and care for the child whom they were in charge of make sure that the child was instructed in what they should do. Use a natural phrase or term in your language for describing this role. If you do not have this role in your culture you could describe it for your readers. Alternate translation: “people supervise a child” or “people who are in charge of a child” or “people who are in charge of a minor” or “people who are responsible for a minor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-GAL	4	2	v5g9	translate-unknown	οἰκονόμους	1	trustees	Here, the word **stewards** refers to people who are entrusted with the role of managing property until the child who is the heir is old enough to inherit it. Use a natural phrase or term in your language for describing this role. If you do not have this role in your culture you could describe it for your readers. Alternate translation: “people manage the child’s possessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-GAL	4	2	khzl	figs-activepassive	προθεσμίας τοῦ πατρός	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the “father” did it. Alternate translation: “date which his father appointed” or “time which his father appointed”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	4	3	ocm2	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὕτως	1		Here, the word **So** indicates that what follows is comparable to, and similar in some way to what has just described in [4:1-2](../04/01.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing something that corresponds in some way to something that was introduced previously. Alternate translation: “In a similar way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	4	3	d6v9	figs-exclusive	ἦμεν	1	General Information:	The word **we** here refers to all Christians, including Paul’s readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	4	3	n21q	figs-metaphor	ὅτε ἦμεν νήπιοι	1	when we were children	Paul speaks of people who have not yet trusted in Jesus as if they were **children**. If your readers would not understand what **children** means in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative as modeled by the UST or you could translate this phrase as a simile. Alternate translation: “when we did not yet believe in Jesus” or “when we were like children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	3	rwwj	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου ἤμεθα δεδουλωμένοι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who was doing the action, Paul says that “the elemental principles of the world” were doing it. See the note on personification regarding **the elemental principles of this world**. Alternate translation: “the elemental principles of the world were enslaving us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	4	3	cd2w	figs-metaphor	δεδουλωμένοι	1	we were enslaved to the elemental principles of the world	Paul speaks of being under the control of **the elemental principles of the world** as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslaved** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	3	l0fg	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ	1		Here, the word **under** means “under the power of” or “under the authority of.” See how you translated the word **under** in [4:2](../04/02.md) where Paul uses it with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “under the power of” or “under the authority of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	3	v1zo	figs-personification	ὑπὸ τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου & δεδουλωμένοι	1		Here, Paul speaks of **the elemental principles of the world** as though they were a person who could enslave other people. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Paul speaks of **the elemental principles of the world** as though they have the power to enslave a person but it is actually humans, who do not yet believe in the Messiah, who willing submit to these **elemental principles** and allow themselves to be enslaved. See [5:1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	4	3	u462		τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου	1	the elemental principles of the world	**the elemental principles of the world** could refer to: (1) the religious and/or moral teachings that people, whether they be a Jew or a non-Jew, seek to obey in order to please God and/or think of themselves as praiseworthy and good. (2) the things prescribed by the Mosaic law. 3) spiritual beings which people thought controlled **the world**.
-GAL	4	4	ogo3	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		The word **But** is introducing a contrast between the time prior to **when the fullness of time came**, which Paul described before this verse, and the time after **the fullness of time came**, which Paul describes in this verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	4	4	ujfp		τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ χρόνου	1		The phrase **the fullness of time** means “the right time” or “the time that God appointed.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the right time” or “the designated time” or “the appointed time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	4	opx2		γενόμενον ἐκ γυναικός	1		The phrase **born from a woman** is an idiom which means that someone is human. Because Jesus existed as God before he was born on earth the emphasis here is that Jesus became human, in addition to being fully God. If your readers would not understand this idiom means here, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “having taken on human nature” or “having become a human being in addition to his divine nature” or “having become a human” or “having been born as a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	4	4	d9c7	figs-explicit	γενόμενον ὑπὸ νόμον	1		The phrase **having been born under the law** means that Jesus, as a Jew, was under the jurisdiction of the law of Moses and therefore it was necessary that he obey it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “having been born under the jurisdiction and requirements of the law of Moses” or “having been born subject to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	4	mzwh	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ νόμον	1		Here, the word **under** means “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the phrase **under the law** in [3:23](../03/23.md) where Paul uses the word **under** with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “under the authority of the law” or “under the jurisdiction of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	4	zt29	figs-explicit	νόμον	1		Here, the phrase **the law** refers to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	5	cb45	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The phrase **in order that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that” or “with the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	4	5	v5cb	figs-metaphor	ἐξαγοράσῃ	1	redeem	Paul uses the metaphor of a person buying back lost property or buying the freedom of a slave as a picture of God sending Jesus to pay the price for people’s sins by dying on the cross. If your readers would not understand what **redeem** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	5	awb9		ἐξαγοράσῃ	1	redeem	See how you translated the word “redeemed” in [3:13](../03/13.md).
-GAL	4	5	s6fw		ὑπὸ νόμον	1		See how you translated the phrase **under the law** in [3:23](../03/23.md) and [4:4](../04/04.md) where Paul uses this phrase with the same meaning.
-GAL	4	5	nppu	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	2		The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God redeemed **the ones under the law**, which was **so that** God could adopt them as his spiritual sons and daughters. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” or “with the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	4	5	eapv		τὴν υἱοθεσίαν ἀπολάβωμεν	1		Alternate translation: “God might adopt us as his sons”
-GAL	4	5	ii90	figs-exclusive	ἀπολάβωμεν	1		The word **we** could refer to: (1) all Christians, both Jews and non-Jews, in which case **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (2) Jewish Christians only, in which case **we** would be exclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	4	5	tpqc	figs-metaphor	τὴν υἱοθεσίαν ἀπολάβωμεν	1		Paul speaks of God giving people a close personal relationship with himself and giving them special rights and privileges as if it were **adoption**. If your readers would not understand what **adoption** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	5	jris	figs-metaphor	υἱοθεσίαν	1		Paul speaks of those who believe in Jesus as if God was their biological, physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the word **sons** in [3:26](../03/26.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	5	lq4r	figs-gendernotations	υἱοθεσίαν	1		Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “adoption as children” or “adoption as God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	4	6	ahbp	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1		Here, Paul is using the word **And** to introduce new information into his ongoing argument. Use a natural form for introducing new information. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	4	6	exc6	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		The word **because** is introducing the reason that **God sent the Spirit of his Son into** the hearts of believers, namely because believers are God’s **sons**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	4	6	l2ny	figs-gendernotations	υἱοί	1		Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	4	6	bikp	figs-metaphor	υἱοί	1		Paul speaks of the Galatian believers as if God was their biological, physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the word **sons** in [4:5](../04/25.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	6	yadl		τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		The phrase **the Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md), where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit.
-GAL	4	6	nei3	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν	1	sent the Spirit of his Son into our hearts	Here, the word **hearts** refers to the innermost part of a person. Paul is describing the innermost part of a person by association with their physical heart. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent term from your culture that is used to describe the center of a person’s inner being or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	4	6	s54r		κρᾶζον	1	who calls	The phrase **crying out** means “to call out loudly.” This phrase does not mean to cry or weep from sorrow.
-GAL	4	6	eqx5	translate-transliterate	Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ	1	God has sent the Spirit of his Son into our hearts, who calls out, “Abba, Father.”	The word **Abba** is an Aramaic word meaning **Father** which the Jews used to address their fathers. Paul writes it as it sounds in Aramaic (he transliterates it) and then translates its meaning into Greek for his readers. Since the Aramaic word **Abba** is followed by the Greek word **Father**, it is best to transliterate **Abba** and then give its meaning in your language as Paul does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-GAL	4	7	jkor	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	God has sent the Spirit of his Son into our hearts, who calls out, “Abba, Father.”	The phrase **So then** introduces the result of what Paul explained in [4:6](../04/06.md). Use a natural form for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	4	7	akb8	figs-you	εἶ	1	you are no longer a slave … you are also an heir	Here,**you** is singular. Paul is probably addressing the Galatian believers by using a singular pronoun in order to emphasize that what he is saying applies to each of them individually. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-GAL	4	7	iler	figs-metaphor	δοῦλος	1		Paul speaks of the Galatian believers being in bondage to the law of Moses as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **a slave** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in bondage to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	7	fzja	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		The word **but** is introducing a contrast. Paul is contrasting being **a son** with being **a slave**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	4	7	swk3	figs-metaphor	υἱός & υἱός	1		See how you translated the word **sons** in [4:5](../04/05.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “a spiritual child of God … a spiritual child of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	7	vmyo	figs-gendernotations	υἱός & υἱός	1		Although the term **son** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a child … a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	4	7	rlc3	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ υἱός, καὶ	1		Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since each of you is a son, you are also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-GAL	4	7	d5hu	figs-metaphor	κληρονόμος	1	heir	See how you translated the word **heir** in [4:1](../04/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	7	eujw	figs-explicit	κληρονόμος	1	heir	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that Paul is referring to inheriting the promises that God made to Abraham and his descendants. Alternate translation: “an heir of the promises made to Abraham” or “an heir of the promises God made to Abraham”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	7	po66	grammar-connect-words-phrases	διὰ Θεοῦ	1		Here, the word **through** is indicating agency. It is indicating that God is the agent by which the Galatians are to inherit the blessings God promised to Abraham and his descendants. Use a natural form for indicating the agency or means by which an action takes place. Alternate translation: “by means of God’s working” or “through God’s working” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	4	8	v4mp	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		The word **But** is introducing a contrast. Paul is contrasting the life of the Galatian believers before they believed in Christ with their life after they came to believe in Christ and as a result became God’s sons (which he explained in [4:1-7](../04/01.md)). Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	4	8	e21a	figs-explicit	εἰδότες Θεὸν	1		Here, the phrase **known God** means “known God personally” and means more than simply having heard or known some things about God. The phrase **known God** refers to close relationship with God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having been in a relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	8	ukf5		ἐδουλεύσατε	1	Connecting Statement:	See how you translated the word **enslaved** in [4:3](../04/03.md).
-GAL	4	8	yx8o	figs-metaphor	ἐδουλεύσατε τοῖς φύσει μὴ οὖσι θεοῖς	1		Paul speaks of the Galatians former way of life in which they practiced false religions and worshiped false gods as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what being **enslaved** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	8	cj5i	figs-explicit	τοῖς φύσει μὴ οὖσι θεοῖς	1	those who are	The phrase, **those, by nature, not being gods** refers to the beings which the Galatians served when they were pagans and were considered by them to be gods, but they were not really gods. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “false gods who were not really gods at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	9	i5p3	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	4	9	kv61		γνόντες & γνωσθέντες	1		Make sure that you translate the words **know** and **known** with the same type of expression as you used to translate the word “known” in [4:8](../04/08.md). The phrase “not having known God” in [4:8](../04/08.md) and the phrases **know God** and **known by God** in this verse are all referring to intimate personal knowledge that comes from a relationship with someone and not merely to being acquainted with someone or familiar with facts pertaining to them.
-GAL	4	9	cfka	figs-activepassive	γνωσθέντες ὑπὸ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “now that God came to know you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	4	9	wkt9	figs-rquestion	πῶς ἐπιστρέφετε πάλιν ἐπὶ τὰ ἀσθενῆ καὶ πτωχὰ στοιχεῖα	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	4	9	b8ue	figs-explicit	ἐπιστρέφετε	1	how is it that you are turning back to … principles?	Here, **turning** means to “to return.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “are you returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	9	n5ie		τὰ ἀσθενῆ καὶ πτωχὰ στοιχεῖα	1	elemental principles	See how you decided to translate the phrase **elemental principles** in [Galatians 4:3](../04/03.md).
-GAL	4	9	w28k	figs-rquestion	οἷς πάλιν ἄνωθεν δουλεύειν θέλετε	1	Do you want to be enslaved all over again?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	4	9	s77e	figs-metaphor	οἷς πάλιν ἄνωθεν δουλεύειν θέλετε	1	Do you want to be enslaved all over again?	Here, **to be enslaved** is a metaphor for being obligated to obey certain rules and regulations. If your readers would not understand what being **enslaved** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. See how you chose to translate the word **enslaved** in [4:8](../04/08.md) where it is also used with a metaphorical use. Alternate translation: “to which once more you want to act like a slave who must obey his master” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	10	j8k2	figs-explicit	παρατηρεῖσθε	1	You observe	Here, the word **observe** refers to observing something for religious purposes in order to gain God’s favor and approval. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You observe for religious purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	10	fd09	figs-yousingular	παρατηρεῖσθε	1		The word **You** is plural here and refers to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-GAL	4	10	w7d5	figs-metonymy	ἡμέρας & καὶ μῆνας, καὶ καιροὺς, καὶ ἐνιαυτούς	1	You observe days and new moons and seasons and years	Paul is describing the different Jewish celebrations and religious observances (required in the law of Moses) by associating them with the times when they took place. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Jewish Sabbath days and other days prescribed in the law of Moses. You also observe the monthly Jewish celebrations and annual Jewish festivals as well the Jewish sacred years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	4	11	ct4e	figs-explicit	φοβοῦμαι	1		Here, the phrase **I am afraid** means “I am concerned about.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	11	yytt	figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς & ὑμᾶς	1		Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are plural and refer to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-GAL	4	11	chxa	figs-doublenegatives	μή πως εἰκῇ κεκοπίακα εἰς ὑμᾶς	1		If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “that I have possibly labored among you for nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-GAL	4	11	alfd	figs-explicit	κεκοπίακα	1		Here, the word **labored** refers to Paul’s work of teaching the Galatians the truths of the Christian faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have labored in teaching and preaching” or “I have taught the truths of the Christian faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	11	bsv1		εἰκῇ	1	may have been for nothing	Alternate translation: “without results” or “to no avail” or “purposelessly”
-GAL	4	12	mad2	figs-yousingular	οἴδατε & ὑμῖν	1	may have been for nothing	In this verse both occurrences of the word **you** are plural and refer to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-GAL	4	12	p9gn	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated the word **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	4	12	gteu	figs-explicit	γίνεσθε ὡς ἐγώ, ὅτι κἀγὼ ὡς ὑμεῖς	1		Here, Paul is referring to obeying the rules and regulations prescribed in the law of Moses. He is asking the Galatians to become like himself by not acting as if the law of Moses has authority over his life, because he originally became as they were, when they did not seek to conduct their lives according to the rules prescribed in the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	12	b4w2	grammar-connect-logic-result	γίνεσθε ὡς ἐγώ, ὅτι κἀγὼ ὡς ὑμεῖς	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because I became as you, you also should become as I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	4	12	cg8i	figs-ellipsis	κἀγὼ ὡς ὑμεῖς	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Here, the implied words are **became** and **are**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context as modeled by the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	4	12	n3wf	figs-litotes	οὐδέν με ἠδικήσατε	1	You did me no wrong	Here. Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “You treated me well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-GAL	4	13	ytex	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	You did me no wrong	Paul is using the word **Now** to introduce background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])m
-GAL	4	13	a22l	figs-extrainfo	δι’ ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς, εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν	1	You did me no wrong	Here, Paul states that it was a physical sickness that previously caused him to proclaim the gospel to Galatians. This could mean that (1) Paul was already in Galatia and a physical sickness caused Paul to stay in Galatia longer and recover and because of this delay he had time and opportunity to proclaim the gospel to the Galatians (2) because of a physical sickness Paul went to Galatia to recover from his sickness and while there he proclaimed the gospel to the Galatians. Because Paul does not explicitly state which of these two scenarios provided the opportunity for him to preach the gospel, but rather simply focuses on the sickness, you should not further explain what Paul says here about his sickness but rather use a general expression as modeled by the ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-GAL	4	13	ho2d	grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’	1	You did me no wrong	Here, Paul is using the phrase **because** to introduce the reason that he **proclaimed the gospel** to the Galatians **previously**, which was **because** he had to stay in Galatia because of a physical sickness. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason-result clause. (Here, the reason is **a weakness of the flesh** and the result is that Paul **proclaimed the gospel to** the Galatians). Alternate translation: “on account of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	4	13	qstf	figs-abstractnouns	ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς	1	You did me no wrong	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weakness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “weak”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	4	13	iuz9	figs-synecdoche	τῆς σαρκὸς	1		Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase **the flesh** in [2:20](../02/20.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the body” or “of my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-GAL	4	14	tk1l	figs-extrainfo	τὸν πειρασμὸν ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου	1	Though my physical condition put you to the test	The phrase **your trial in my flesh** means that Paul had some physical problem or malady that either itself caused difficulty (a **trial**) for the Galatians or caused difficulty (a **trial**) for them because they had to care for or help him as a result of his difficulty. Because Paul does not specify the specifics of how his physical malady created a **trial** for the Galatians, it is best to translate this phrase with a general phrase which leaves room for either possibility as modeled by the ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-GAL	4	14	v9xa		οὐκ ἐξουθενήσατε	1	despise	Alternate translation: “you did not scorn” or “you did not hate”
-GAL	4	14	h3vm	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν πειρασμὸν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trial**, you could express the same idea some other way that would be natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	4	14	qz18	figs-synecdoche	σαρκί	1		Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase **the flesh** in [2:20](../02/20.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-GAL	4	14	l244	figs-explicit	ὡς ἄγγελον Θεοῦ	1		The phrase **as an angel of God** means “as if I were an angel of God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as if I were an angel of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	14	gbhr	figs-explicit	ὡς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1		The phrase **as Christ Jesus** means “as you would welcome Christ Jesus.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as you would welcome Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	15	ard2	figs-rquestion	ποῦ οὖν ὁ μακαρισμὸς ὑμῶν	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to show the Galatian believers his disappointment and in order to cause them to think about what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	4	15	kcer	figs-abstractnouns	μακαρισμὸς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blessing**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	4	15	paah	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces information which proves how the Galatians had previously felt about Paul. Use a natural form in your language for introducing this material. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	4	15	ogmb	figs-hypo	εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν ἐξορύξαντες, ἐδώκατέ μοι	1		Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers remember the way that they formerly felt and thought about Paul. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “if it were possible that you could have torn out your eyes and then given the to me, you would have done so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-GAL	4	15	o5tg	figs-ellipsis	εἰ δυνατὸν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if it were possible for you to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	4	15	wyyt	figs-idiom	εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν ἐξορύξαντες, ἐδώκατέ μοι	1		The phrase **having torn out your eyes, you would have given them to me** could: (1) be an idiom indicating the great love and devotion which the Galatians formerly had for Paul. In Paul’s time the eyes were considered a person’s most precious possession so if it were possible for a person to take out their eyes and give them to another person this would be a sign of extreme devotion and love towards the person to whom they were given. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you formerly loved me very much and would have given me your most valued possessions to show me your love” (2) indicate that Paul had some type of disease and by Paul saying this here he is indicating the great concern which the Galatians had formerly shown for him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	4	16	i73s	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		Paul is using the phrase **So then** to introduce a reason-result clause in which **speaking truth** to the Galatians is the reason, and them acting as if Paul were their **enemy** is the result. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason-result clause. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Therefore, as a result of” or “So then, as a result of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	4	16	zznv	figs-rquestion	ἐχθρὸς ὑμῶν γέγονα, ἀληθεύων ὑμῖν	1		The phrase **speaking truth to you, have I become your enemy** could be: (1) a rhetorical question in which Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to show the Galatian believers his disappointment with them and in order to cause them to think about what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (2) a statement in which Paul is telling the Galatians that based on the way they are acting it seems as if he has now become their enemy by telling them the truth. Alternate translation: “as a result of my speaking the truth to you, you are acting as if I have become your enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	4	16	mhkl	figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθεύων ὑμῖν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “true”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by telling you things that are true” or Alternate translation: “because I have told you what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	4	17	dxtd	figs-explicit	ζηλοῦσιν & θέλουσιν	1		In this verse, the pronouns **They** and **they** both refer to the false teachers who were Judaizers and were teaching the Galatians false things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The false teachers are zealous … these false teachers desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	17	lt7y		οὐ καλῶς	1		Alternate translation: “but not in a good way” or “but not in a way that is right” or “but their intentions are not good”
-GAL	4	17	rulh	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here, the word **but** is introducing a contrast. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	4	17	s9kn	figs-explicit	ἐκκλεῖσαι ὑμᾶς	1	to shut you out	Here, the the phrase **to separate you** refers to separating the Galatian believers from Paul and probably also not only from Paul but also from his ministry partners because they all taught a gospel message that was different from what the false teachers were teaching to the Galatian believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly who Paul is saying that the false teachers are trying to separate the Galatian believers from as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “to separate you from us” or “to shut you out from us” or “to make you stop being loyal to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	17	wrvk	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	to shut you out	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which the false teachers desired **to separate** the Galatian believers from Paul and his ministry partners. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	4	17	iv1d		αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε	1	zealous for them	Alternate translation: “you would be devoted to them” or “you would be attached to them”.
-GAL	4	18	hjp6	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	zealous for them	The word **But** could: (1) be introducing a contrast. Use a natural form for introducing a contrast. (2) be introducing additional comments that Paul wants to make regarding what he has just finished saying prior to this verse. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	4	18	m5m2	figs-explicit	καλῷ	1	zealous for them	Here, the word **good** refers to “good things.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	19	u3eb	figs-metaphor	τέκνα μου	1	My little children	Paul speaks of the Galatian believers as if they were his **children** and he was their mother. Paul calls the Galatian believers his **children** because they believed in Jesus as a result of Paul proclaiming the gospel to them. The Galatian believers experienced their spiritual birth as a result of Paul’s work of proclaiming the gospel to them, so he was their spiritual mother and they were his spiritual children. If your readers would not understand what **children** means in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You who believed the message about Jesus that I proclaimed to you” or “My spiritual children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	19	yf9e	figs-metaphor	πάλιν ὠδίνω	1	I am in the pains of childbirth for you until Christ is formed in you	Paul speaks of his work of seeking to help the Galatians grow in spiritual maturity, and the mental and physical suffering he endured as a result of this work, as if it were the **labor** that a mother endures when giving birth to a child. If it would be helpful to your readers you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “I am again in anguish as though I am a woman giving birth” or “it is as if I am in labor again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	19	u9fp	figs-synecdoche	μορφωθῇ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν	1		The phrase **Christ would be formed in you** could be: (1) synecdoche in which case Paul is using the word **Christ** to refer to being a mature follower of Christ who is mature in their thinking and whose actions resemble Christ’s actions. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Christ’s nature becomes fully developed in you” or “you become a mature follower of Christ” or “you resemble Christ in your actions and in your thinking” (2) be a metaphor in which case Paul is describing the Galatian believers as if they were mothers and Christ was being formed inside them. Alternate translation: “Christ's nature becomes developed in you completely and wholeheartedly as a child becomes developed in his mother's womb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-GAL	4	19	k4fo	figs-activepassive	μορφωθῇ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν	1	I am in the pains of childbirth for you until Christ is formed in you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forms Christ in you” or “God would form Christ in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	4	20	csin		δὲ	1		Alternate translation: “and”
-GAL	4	20	ucgi	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἤθελον & παρεῖναι πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἄρτι, καὶ ἀλλάξαι τὴν φωνήν μου, ὅτι ἀποροῦμαι ἐν ὑμῖν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because I am perplexed about you, I am desiring to be present with you now and to change my tone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	4	20	j8on	figs-explicit	ἀλλάξαι τὴν φωνήν μου	1		The phrase **change my tone** refers to Paul “changing the manner of his communication” towards the Galatians from being stern and rebuking to being more affectionate. Paul loved the Galatian believers, however, because of the serious nature of the false teaching which the Galatians were being tempted to accept, combined with Paul’s physical distance from the Galatians, he felt that he needed to write to them and firmly and sternly correct their false thinking with the hope that they would not believe or follow false teaching. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what the phrase **change my tone** means here. Alternate translation: “to speak in a different manner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	21	z1um		λέγετέ μοι	1	Tell me	Alternate translation: “I want to ask a question” or “I want to tell you something”
-GAL	4	21	sf5v	figs-yousingular	οἱ	1		Here, the word **you** is plural. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-GAL	4	21	y3km		θέλοντες	1		See how you translated the word **desiring** in [4:20](../04/20.md).
-GAL	4	21	ysq4		ὑπὸ νόμον	1		See how you translated the phrase **under the law** in [3:23](../03/23.md). Paul uses this phrase with the same meaning in [3:23](../03/23.md), [4:4](../04/04.md), and [4:5](../04/05.md).
-GAL	4	21	u6fs	figs-rquestion	τὸν νόμον οὐκ ἀκούετε	1	do you not listen to the law?	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to cause the Galatian believers to think about and reflect on what he is going to say next. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you need to learn what the law really says” or “let me tell you what the law really says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	4	21	kw9j		τὸν νόμον οὐκ ἀκούετε	1		Alternate translation: “do you not comprehend what the law is teaching” or “do you not understand what the law is actually teaching”
-GAL	4	22	fkbv	figs-explicit	γέγραπται	1		Here, Paul uses **it is written** to mean that it is written in the Old Testament Scriptures. Paul assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “it has been written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	22	gthm	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, “Moses” did it. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” or “Moses wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	4	22	ljse	figs-quotemarks	Ἀβραὰμ δύο υἱοὺς ἔσχεν; ἕνα ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης, καὶ ἕνα ἐκ τῆς ἐλευθέρας	1		In this verse and in all of [4:23](../04/23.md) Paul is summarizing a story from the book of Genesis and is not directly quoting Scripture so you should not use quotation marks or anything else that might cause your readers to think that Paul is directly quoting Scripture here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-GAL	4	22	wbg3		ἕνα ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης, καὶ ἕνα ἐκ τῆς ἐλευθέρας	1		Alternate translation: “one son from the slave girl and one son from the free woman”
-GAL	4	23	djsd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλ’	1		Here, Paul is using the word **And** to introduce additional information regarding the two sons mentioned in [4:22](../04/22.md). In the remainder of this verse Paul contrasts the way in which the two sons were born. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	4	23	bthj		παιδίσκης & ἐλευθέρας	1		See how you translated **slave girl** and **free woman** in [4:22](../04/22.md).
-GAL	4	23	s2pc	figs-explicit	κατὰ σάρκα	1		Here, the phrase **according to the flesh** means that Ishmael was born in the natural way by which all children are born, without God intervening and performing a miracle. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the natural way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	23	wjvp	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast. It is introducing a contrast between Ishmael, **the one** who **was born from the slave girl according to the flesh** and Isaac, who was born **from the free woman, through promise**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	4	23	qnl9	figs-explicit	δι’ ἐπαγγελίας	1		Here, the phrase **through promise** means “through God’s promise to Abraham” and refers to God supernaturally intervening and enabling Abraham’s wife Sarah (**the free woman**) to become pregnant in order to fulfill his **promise** to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “through God’s promise to Abraham” or “was conceived supernaturally as a result of what God had promised Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	23	e2i9		ἐπαγγελίας	1		See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
-GAL	4	24	jfuz	figs-explicit	ἅτινά	1		**These things** refers to the **things** Paul has just described in [4:22-23](../04/22.md) regarding Abraham, his two sons, and Hagar and Sarah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These events I have just described to you” or “These things I have just described to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	24	rilp	figs-activepassive	ἅτινά ἐστιν ἀλληγορούμενα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “he” is doing it. Alternate translation: “I am speaking of these things allegorically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	4	24	k5qu		ἅτινά ἐστιν ἀλληγορούμενα	1	as an allegory	An **allegory** is a story in which things within the story are interpreted as representing something else. Here, the things in the story are meant to be interpreted as representing spiritual truths and realities. In this allegory, the two women referred to in [4:22](../04/22.md) represent two different covenants. If your language has a word or phrase to describe what an **allegory** is you can use that here. Alternately, if it would help your readers, you can describe what an allegory is in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am speaking of these things in order to teach you a spiritual truth” or “I am speaking of these things in order to use them as an analogy so that I can teach you an important truth”
-GAL	4	24	b120	figs-explicit	αὗται	1		Here, the word **they** refers to Sarah and Hagar. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “these women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	24	mfa9		διαθῆκαι	1		See how you translated the word “covenant” in [3:15](../03/15.md).
-GAL	4	24	mt7j		μία	1		The word **One** here could refer to: (1) the covenant which God made at Mount Sinai which resulted in spiritual slavery to the law. Alternate translation: “One covenant” (2) Hagar in which case Paul means that she corresponds to Mount Sinai (See [4:25](../04/25.md)) and gave birth to children destined for slavery. Alternate translation: “One woman”
-GAL	4	24	u4hr	figs-synecdoche	Ὄρους Σινά	1	Mount Sinai	Paul uses **Mount Sinai** to refer to the covenant with the laws that Moses gave to the Israelites there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use plain language to express this. Alternate translation: “Mount Sinai, where Moses received the law and gave it to Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-GAL	4	24	aani	figs-metaphor	εἰς δουλείαν γεννῶσα	1		Paul speaks of the law of Moses “producing” or “resulting in” something as if the process of “producing” were **giving birth**. Paul speaks of the “spiritual bondage” of being under the law of Moses as if it were **slavery**. Paul is saying the the law of Moses “produces spiritual slavery.” If your readers would not understand what **giving birth** or **slavery** mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and produces spiritual slavery” or “and results in spiritual slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	24	e3rc	figs-abstractnouns	δουλείαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slavery**, you could express the same idea with a concrete noun such as “slave”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	4	25	u1cc	figs-explicit	τὸ&Ἁγὰρ Σινά Ὄρος ἐστὶν	1	she represents	**Hagar is Mount Sinai** means that “Hagar symbolizes Mount Sinai.” Here, Paul begin to explain the meaning of the allegory which he began in [4:22](../04/22.md). If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly what the phrase **Hagar is Mount Sinai** means here as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “Hagar represents Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	25	klcv	figs-synecdoche	τὸ&Ἁγὰρ Σινά Ὄρος ἐστὶν ἐν τῇ Ἀραβίᾳ	1	she represents	Paul uses **Mount Sinai in Arabia** to refer to the covenant with the laws that Moses gave to the Israelites there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use plain language to express this. Alternate translation: “Hagar resembles Mount Sinai in Arabia, where Moses received the law and gave it to Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-GAL	4	25	azzt	figs-ellipsis	συνστοιχεῖ	1	she represents	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. The words that Paul leaves out could be: (1) Hagar. Alternate translation: “Hagar corresponds” (2) Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “Mount Sinai corresponds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	4	25	xvhr	figs-metonymy	νῦν Ἰερουσαλήμ, δουλεύει γὰρ	1	she represents	Paul is describing the religion of Judaism (which emphasized obeying the law of Moses) by association with the city of Jerusalem, which was the center of this religion. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “religion of Judaism, for all who follow this religion are in slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	4	25	bonn	figs-metaphor	δουλεύει γὰρ μετὰ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς	1		Paul speaks of the religion of Judaism, with its emphasis on obeying the law of Moses, as being **in slavery**. Here, Paul uses the word **slavery** to refer to the ”spiritual bondage“ that seeking to obey the religious system based on the law of Moses creates for those who seek to obey it as a means of meriting God’s approval. Here, **slavery** refers to “spiritual bondage” and **children** refers to those people who seek to obey the law of Moses as a means of meriting God’s approval. If your readers would not understand what **slavery** and **children** mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “for Jerusalem represents the religious system of Judaism, which results in spiritual bondage for all those practice it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	25	frft	figs-personification	δουλεύει&μετὰ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς	1		Here, Paul refers to the city of **Jerusalem** as though it were a woman (**she** and **her**) who could be **in slavery** and have **children**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem represents the religious system of Judaism, which results in spiritual bondage for all those practice it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	4	25	flc8	figs-abstractnouns	δουλεύει	1	she represents	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slavery**, you could express the same idea with a concrete noun such as “slave”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	4	26	busv	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	she represents	Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast between “the present Jerusalem” mentioned in [425:](../04/25.md) and **the Jerusalem above** in this verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-GAL	4	26	qsz6		ἡ&ἄνω Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1		The phrase **the Jerusalem above** could refer to: (1) the heavenly city of God. Alternate translation: “the heavenly Jerusalem” (2) all Christians and be referring to the Christian church which is comprised of all those who believe in Jesus. REVISIT-SEE SIL EX SUMM PG 175
-GAL	4	26	qpxq	figs-explicit	ἐλευθέρα	1		Here, the word **free** refers to spiritual freedom and freedom from the law and sin. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “spiritually free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	26	iwg1	figs-metaphor	ἥτις ἐστὶν μήτηρ ἡμῶν	1		Paul speaks of **the Jerusalem above** as if it was were the **mother**. If your readers would not understand what **mother** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. REVISIT-SEE SIL EX SUMM PG 175 Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	26	c4qu	figs-personification	μήτηρ ἡμῶν	1		Paul speaks of **the Jerusalem above** as if it was were a **mother**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	4	26	ijkp	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		When Paul says **our**, he is speaking of all believers in Jesus, which would include himself and the Galatian believers, so **our** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	4	27	kfc6	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, Paul uses the word **For** to indicate that he is introducing material which supports what he said in [4:26](../04/26.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing information which supports a prior claim. (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	4	27	jt53		γέγραπται	1		Here, Paul uses the phrase it is written to indicate that what follows is a quotation from the Old Testament Scriptures. Paul assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	4	27	ummm	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the prophet “Isaiah” did it. Alternate translation: “Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	4	27	jql2	writing-quotations	εὐφράνθητι, στεῖρα, ἡ οὐ τίκτουσα, ῥῆξον καὶ βόησον, ἡ οὐκ ὠδίνουσα, ὅτι πολλὰ τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐρήμου μᾶλλον, ἢ τῆς ἐχούσης τὸν ἄνδρα	1	Rejoice	This is a quotation from Isaiah 54:1. Use a natural way of indicating that something is a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-GAL	4	27	y6x4			1		
-GAL	4	27	scqa	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		The word **because** is introducing the reason to **Rejoice**. Use a natural form for introducing a reason to do something. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	4	28	jfx1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1		Here, Paul uses the word **Now** to indicate that what he writes next is connected to what he wrote immediately before this and that he is continuing his line of thought. Use a natural form in your language to indicate that what follows is in continuity with what precedes it. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	4	28	oyo4	figs-simile	ὑμεῖς&ἀδελφοί, κατὰ Ἰσαὰκ, ἐπαγγελίας τέκνα ἐστέ	1		The point of this comparison is that anyone who will be like, who . If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-GAL	4	28	p45d	figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς	1		Here, the pronoun **you** is plural. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
-GAL	4	28	ad75	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated the word **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	4	28	ct63	figs-metaphor	ἐπαγγελίας τέκνα	1	children of promise	Here, **children** could: (1) be a metaphor which means “God’s spiritual descendants.” Alternate translation: “God’s spiritual descendants” or “God’s children” (2) be a metaphor which means “Abraham’s spiritual descendants.” Alternate translation: “Abraham’s spiritual descendants” or “Abraham’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	28	u3dr	figs-possession	ἐπαγγελίας τέκνα	1	children of promise	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the source of **children**. He means that the **children** are the **children** or “descendants” which God promised to supernaturally give to Abraham and therefore they are **children** whose source derives from God fulfillment of his **promise** to Abraham. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “children of God’s promise” or “children of God’s promise to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	4	28	u9t0		ἐπαγγελίας	1	children of promise	See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
-GAL	4	29	c9lf		κατὰ σάρκα	1	according to the flesh	See how you translated the phrase **according to flesh** in [4:23](../04/23.md).
-GAL	4	29	gt1e		κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	according to the Spirit	Here, **according to Spirit** means Isaac was born in a supernatural way, through the power of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “because of the Spirit” or “because of the work of the Spirit”
-GAL	4	29	jff1		Πνεῦμα	1		The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit.
-GAL	4	30	ca1m		ἀλλὰ	1		
-GAL	4	30	a2xo	figs-rquestion	τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to get the Galatian believers to think about the scripture verse he cites next. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	4	30	klbo	figs-personification	λέγει ἡ Γραφή	1		Here, Paul speaks of the **scripture** passage he is quoting from Genesis as though it were a were a person who could speak . If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “does Moses say in the scripture” or “does Moses write in the scripture”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	4	30	kg1j	writing-quotations	ἔκβαλε τὴν παιδίσκην καὶ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτῆς; οὐ γὰρ μὴ κληρονομήσει ὁ υἱὸς τῆς παιδίσκης, μετὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τῆς ἐλευθέρας	1		This is a quotation from Genesis. Use a natural way of indicating that something is a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-GAL	4	30	mjj5		κληρονομήσει	1		See how you translated the similar word “inheritance” in [3:18](../03/18.md).
-GAL	4	31	g74v		διό	1		
-GAL	4	31	sy8u	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated the word **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	4	31	iz3b	figs-metaphor	τέκνα	1	brothers	Paul speaks of “spiritual descendants” as if they were **children**. If your readers would not understand what **children** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	4	31	ily3		ἀλλὰ	1		
-GAL	5	intro	bcg3			0		# Galatians 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. In this chapter Paul declares repeatedly that Christ has freed believers from being obligated to obey the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Fruit of the Spirit<br><br>The phrase “the fruit of the Spirit” is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. The word “fruit” is singular and refers to the nine qualities listed in [5:22–23](../05/22.md) to show that they are a united cluster of qualities that are manifested in each believer. Translators should keep the singular form for “fruit” if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
-GAL	5	1	kuu9	figs-explicit	τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, ἡμᾶς Χριστὸς ἠλευθέρωσεν	1	For freedom Christ has set us free	**For freedom Christ set us free** implies that Christ **set** believers **free** from being required to obey the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Christ has set us free from the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	1	dt67	grammar-connect-logic-goal	τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ	1	For freedom Christ has set us free	**For** here indicates that what follows is the purpose for which Christ freed believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose. Alternate translation: “For the purpose of freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	5	1	hh1k	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ&δουλείας	1	For freedom Christ has set us free	See how you translated **freedom** in [2:4](../02/04.md) and **slavery** in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	1	wfny	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1		When Paul says **us** here, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	5	1	j679	figs-metaphor	στήκετε	1	Stand firm	**Stand firm** here refers to someone remaining steadfast in what one believes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be unmoved” or “Remain strong in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	1	eamw	figs-activepassive	μὴ πάλιν&ἐνέχεσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not again subject yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	1	ovu1	figs-metaphor	μὴ πάλιν ζυγῷ δουλείας ἐνέχεσθε	1		Here Paul speaks of someone being obligated to obey the laws God gave the Jews as if that person were **subjected to a yoke of slavery.** If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “do not go back to being obligated to obey the law” or “do not be subjected to the law like one who is under a yoke of slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	1	f969	figs-possession	ζυγῷ δουλείας	1		James is using the possessive form to describe a **yoke** that is **slavery**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a yoke, that is, slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	5	2	bki6	figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1		Paul uses the term **Behold** to focus his audience’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	2	lrsx	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν περιτέμνησθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone circumcises you” or “if you receive circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	2	vk9o	figs-explicit	Χριστὸς ὑμᾶς οὐδὲν ὠφελήσει.	1		In this clause Paul means that if a person is circumcised in order to receive salvation, then what Christ has done to provide salvation for them will not help them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Christ has done will not benefit you at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	3	h4q5	figs-activepassive	περιτεμνομένῳ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who has someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	3	iqy8	figs-explicit	ὅλον τὸν νόμον ποιῆσαι	1		Paul implies that a **circumcised** man must obey **the whole law** in order to be righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to do the whole law to become righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	3	cwlk	grammar-collectivenouns	ὅλον τὸν νόμον	1		Here, **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. See how **law** is translated in [2:16](../02/16.md) and [Romans 2:12](../../rom/02/12.md). Alternate translation: “all of God’s laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-GAL	5	4	v01q	writing-pronouns	κατηργήθητε ἀπὸ Χριστοῦ, οἵτινες ἐν νόμῳ δικαιοῦσθε	1		**You** here refers to **whoever is being justified by the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “You who are being justified by the law were cut off from Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-GAL	5	4	wsls	figs-activepassive	κατηργήθητε&δικαιοῦσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You cut yourselves off … is justifying oneself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	4	h4yu	figs-metaphor	κατηργήθητε ἀπὸ Χριστοῦ	1	You are cut off from Christ	Here, **cut off** refers to being separated from Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You have ended your relationship with Christ” or “You are separated from Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	4	ipf7	figs-explicit	οἵτινες ἐν νόμῳ δικαιοῦσθε	1	you who would be justified by the law	Paul implies that these people were trying to be **justified by** obeying **the law,** which is impossible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever attempts to be justified by obeying the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	4	ygbj	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμῳ	1	you who would be justified by the law	See how you translated **law** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-GAL	5	4	k6xe	figs-metaphor	τῆς χάριτος ἐξεπέσατε	1		Here Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were something that a person could fall away from. He means that people who are trying to save themselves by obeying the law do not receive God’s **grace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you have rejected the grace of God” or “God will no longer be gracious to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	5	nabj	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul stated in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	5	5	kvpn	figs-explicit	Πνεύματι	1		Here and throughout this chapter, **the Spirit** refers to the Holy **Spirit**. See how you translated the same use of **Spirit** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	5	vvk6	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως&ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith**, **hope**, and **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated **faith** in [2:16](../02/16.md) and **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md). Alternate translation: “by trusting … what is hopeful of what it righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	5	pdm1	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and those who trust in Christ instead of the law, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	5	5	qg9m	figs-infostructure	ἡμεῖς&ἐκ πίστεως ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης ἀπεκδεχόμεθα	1	by faith, we eagerly wait for the hope of righteousness	This could mean: (1) **we eagerly wait** **by faith**. Alternate translation: “we eagerly wait by faith for the hope of righteousness” (2) **righteousness** is **by faith**. Alternate translation: “we eagerly wait for the hope of righteousness by faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-GAL	5	5	xtqp	figs-possession	ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης	1		This could mean: (1) people **hope** for **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the hope for righteousness” (2) **the hope** is **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the hope, that is, righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	5	6	rn0r	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is a reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	5	6	bhdg	figs-metaphor	ἐν&Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		See how you translated this phrase in [3:26](../03/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	6	y2ww	figs-abstractnouns	περιτομή&ἀκροβυστία&πίστις&ἀγάπης	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision**, **uncircumcision**, **faith**, and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated **faith** in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “being circumcised … not being circumcised … trusting … loving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	6	qp6b	figs-idiom	οὔτε περιτομή τι ἰσχύει, οὔτε ἀκροβυστία	1	means anything	Here, **anything** refers to being important to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither circumcision nor uncircumcision is capable of being important to God” or “neither circumcision nor uncircumcision matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	5	6	bw6b	figs-ellipsis	πίστις δι’ ἀγάπης ἐνεργουμένη	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “faith working through love is capable of something” or “faith working through love matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	5	7	jj48	figs-metaphor	ἐτρέχετε καλῶς	1	You were running	Here Paul refers to becoming more spiritually mature as if someone were **running** a race. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You were making excellent progress in your faith” or “you were doing so well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	7	ntd5	figs-rquestion	τίς ὑμᾶς ἐνέκοψεν, ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι?	1	You were running	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not let have let someone hinder you, not to be persuaded by truth!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	5	7	w0iq	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι	1		This clause provides the expected result of what Paul said in the previous clause. Use a natural form for indicating a result. Alternate translation: “which is resulting in you not being persuaded by truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	5	7	bmy4	figs-activepassive	ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι	1	You were running	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the truth is not persuading you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	7	vuf8		ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι	1		The phrase translated as **not to be persuaded by truth** could also be translated as “not to obey the truth.”
-GAL	5	7	krep	figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθείᾳ	1		See how you translated **truth** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	8	sx6u	figs-explicit	ἡ πεισμονὴ	1	persuasion	Here, **persuasion** refers to some Galatians being persuaded to obey the laws God gave the Jews instead of trusting in Jesus for salvation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You being persuaded to stop trusting in the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	8	bqxm	writing-pronouns	τοῦ καλοῦντος ὑμᾶς	1		Here, **the one calling you** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who is calling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-GAL	5	9	q926	writing-proverbs	μικρὰ ζύμη ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ	1		Here Paul quotes or creates a proverb, which is a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb gives a comparison: Just as a small amount of **leaven** **leavens** a whole **lump** of dough, so a small amount of false teaching can deceive many people in a church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “It has been said that a little leaven causes a whole lump of dough to be leavened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
-GAL	5	9	xds5	translate-unknown	μικρὰ ζύμη ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ	1		The word **leaven** refers to a substance that causes fermentation and expansion within a batch of dough or batter. Here, **leavens** refers to the fermentation process and **lump** refers to the batch of dough. If your readers would not be familiar with **leaven**, you could use the name of a substance that they would be familiar with, or you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “A little yeast causes all of the batch of dough to swell up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-GAL	5	10	usoc	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	you will take no other view	Here, **in the Lord** indicates the basis or cause for which Paul was **confident in** the Galatian believers, and **the Lord** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar expression “in Christ” in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “on the basis of us being in union with the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	10	enp1	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν ἄλλο φρονήσετε	1	you will take no other view	Here, **nothing otherwise** refers to **nothing** other than what Paul has told his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will think nothing other than what I am telling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	10	jc72	figs-genericnoun	ὁ&ταράσσων ὑμᾶς&ὅστις ἐὰν ᾖ	1	is troubling you	Jesus is speaking of several people who were **troubling** the Galatian believers, not just one particular man. Paul states in [1:7](../01/07.md) that there were several false teachers causing trouble. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “those troubling you … whoever they may be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-GAL	5	10	llh5	figs-abstractnouns	βαστάσει τὸ κρίμα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	11	nv5x	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Brothers	See how you translated the same use of **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	5	11	d4mm	figs-hypo	ἐγὼ&εἰ περιτομὴν ἔτι κηρύσσω, τί ἔτι διώκομαι	1		Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help emphasize that he does not **proclaim circumcision**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “were I still proclaiming circumcision, then why am I still being persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-GAL	5	11	gaq4	figs-metonymy	περιτομὴν&κηρύσσω	1		Here, **proclaim circumcision** refers to telling people that they must be circumcised in order to be saved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “proclaim the need to be circumcised” or “proclaim that everyone must be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	5	11	wgui	figs-abstractnouns	περιτομὴν	1		See how you translated **circumcision** in [verse 6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	11	hgo8	figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι διώκομαι?	1		Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I would not still be persecuted!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-GAL	5	11	y3ug	figs-activepassive	τί ἔτι διώκομαι&κατήργηται τὸ σκάνδαλον τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	the stumbling block of the cross has been removed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “why are people still persecuting me … I would have removed the stumbling block of the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	11	l5tk	figs-explicit	ἄρα κατήργηται τὸ σκάνδαλον τοῦ σταυροῦ	1		This sentence gives both the result of proclaiming **circumcision** and the reason why someone who proclaimed **circumcision** would not be **persecuted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would not be persecuted because proclaiming circumcision would remove the stumbling block of the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	11	z2hj	figs-possession	τὸ σκάνδαλον τοῦ σταυροῦ	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the stumbling block** that is **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the stumbling block, that is, the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	5	11	arj5	figs-metaphor	τὸ σκάνδαλον	1	the stumbling block of the cross has been removed	Here, **stumbling block** refers to something that offends people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the offense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	11	nipj	figs-metonymy	τοῦ σταυροῦ	1		Here, **the cross** refers to Christ’s sacrificial death on the cross, which was a very offensive way to die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of what Jesus did when he died on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	5	12	e7c2	figs-exclamations	ὄφελον καὶ ἀποκόψονται, οἱ ἀναστατοῦντες ὑμᾶς	1		If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “O how I wish that the ones disturbing you would even castrate themselves!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-GAL	5	12	sfl2	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἀποκόψονται	1	castrate themselves	This could mean: (1) Paul wished that the false teachers who wanted to circumcise the Galatian believers would cut off their male organs, as stated literally in the ULT. (2) Paul wished that the false teachers would leave the Christian community. Alternate translation: “will even remove themselves from among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	13	y1g7	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For	**For** here could indicate: (1) Paul is transitioning back to the topic he introduced in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (2) the reason for the harsh words Paul said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I wish they would do so because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-GAL	5	13	ekb2	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς&ἐπ’ ἐλευθερίᾳ ἐκλήθητε	1	you were called to freedom	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has called you to freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	13	w433	figs-explicit	ἐλευθερίᾳ&τὴν ἐλευθερίαν	1	For	Here, **freedom** implies that Christ sets believers free from being required to obey the laws God gave the Jews. See how you translated the similar expression in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “freedom from the law … that freedom from the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	13	dgaf	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλευθερίᾳ&ἐλευθερίαν	1	you were called to freedom	See how you translated **freedom** in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	13	yp6r	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated the same use of **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	5	13	b62s	figs-personification	ἀφορμὴν τῇ σαρκί	1		Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who could take advantage of **an opportunity**. He is referring to believers thinking they can sin because they do not have to obey the laws God gave the Jews . If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “an opportunity to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]).
-GAL	5	13	viv6	figs-metaphor	τῇ σαρκί	1		Here Paul uses **flesh** to refer to sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for your sinful nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	13	ierd	figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς ἀγάπης	1		Here, **through** indicates the means by which believers should **serve one another**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	13	iki8	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀγάπης	1		See how you translated **love** in [verse 6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	14	cu9y	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul’s readers should obey the command he gave in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “You must do this for one another because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	5	14	ct8i	figs-metaphor	ὁ&πᾶς νόμος ἐν ἑνὶ λόγῳ πεπλήρωται	1	the whole law is fulfilled in one command	This could mean: (1) this **one command** sums up **all the law**. Alternate translation: “all the law is summed up in just one command” (2) someone who obeys this **one command** obeys **all the law**. Alternate translation: “by obeying one commandment, you obey the whole law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	14	eaeo	figs-activepassive	ὁ&πᾶς νόμος ἐν ἑνὶ λόγῳ πεπλήρωται	1	the whole law is fulfilled in one command	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “one command has fulfilled all the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	14	pda2	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ&νόμος	1	the whole law is fulfilled in one command	See how you translated **law** in the [2:16](../02/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-GAL	5	14	qt9c	figs-youcrowd	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1	You must love your neighbor as yourself	The words **you**, **your**, and **yourself** are singular here because, even though Moses said this to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was supposed to obey this command. So in your translation, use the singular forms of **you**, **your**, and **yourself** in this verse, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
-GAL	5	14	zdv4	figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1	You must love your neighbor as yourself	**You will love** is a statement that Moses uses to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You must love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-GAL	5	15	yk60	figs-metaphor	εἰ δὲ ἀλλήλους δάκνετε καὶ κατεσθίετε	1		Here Paul speaks of the Galatian believers fighting each other as if they were wild animals that attack each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “if you are mistreating and hurting one another” or “if you are acting like wild animals that bite and devour one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	15	l2m9	figs-metaphor	μὴ ὑπ’ ἀλλήλων ἀναλωθῆτε	1		Here Paul speaks of the Galatian believers fighting each other as if they were wild animals that eat each other. Here **consumed** could mean: (1) the believers themselves would be destroyed. Alternate translation: “you might not be destroyed by one another” (2) the fellowship of Galatian believers would be destroyed. Alternate translation: “your group of believers might not be destroyed by one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	15	itx6	figs-activepassive	μὴ ὑπ’ ἀλλήλων ἀναλωθῆτε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might not consume one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	16	yb58	figs-metaphor	Πνεύματι περιπατεῖτε	1	walk by the Spirit	Here Paul uses **walk** to refer to how a person lives and behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “act by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	16	tk8i	figs-explicit	Πνεύματι	1	walk by the Spirit	The phrase **by the Spirit** implies being directed or controlled by the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the direction of the Holy Spirit” or “according to how the Holy Spirit leads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	16	ut3t	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1		The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-GAL	5	16	dyj7	figs-idiom	ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς οὐ μὴ τελέσητε	1		The phrase **you would certainly not fulfill desires** refers to not doing what someone sinfully wants to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you would certainly not do what the flesh desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	5	16	iron	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **desires**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what the flesh desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	16	rl5s	figs-personification	ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς	1	the desires of the sinful nature	Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who has **desires**. He is referring to what a person wants to do as a result of having a sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how this phrase is translated in [Romans 13:14](../../rom/13/14.md). Alternate translation: “what you want to do because of your sinful nature” or “the things you want to do because you are sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]).
-GAL	5	16	w8a1	figs-metaphor	σαρκὸς	1	the desires of the sinful nature	Here Paul uses **flesh** to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated this **flesh** in [verse 13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	17	mbdm	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul commanded his readers to “walk by the Spirit” in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “I say this to you because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	5	17	m7td	figs-metaphor	ἡ&σὰρξ&τῆς σαρκός	1		See how you translated this **flesh** in [verse 13](../05/13.md) and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	17	xjj9	figs-explicit	ἡ&σὰρξ ἐπιθυμεῖ κατὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		The phrase **desires against** implies desiring to do what is **against the Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the flesh desires to do things that are against the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	17	w7kv	figs-personification	ἡ&σὰρξ ἐπιθυμεῖ	1		Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who **desires**. He is referring to what a person **desires** to do as a result of having a sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what you want to do because of your sinful nature” or “the things you want to do because you are sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]).
-GAL	5	17	oyog	figs-ellipsis	τὸ&Πνεῦμα κατὰ τῆς σαρκός	1		Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If if would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the Spirit desires against the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	5	17	xp0l	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the **desires** of **the flesh** and **the Spirit** are against each other. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “This is for the reason that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	5	17	r3dk	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1		The pronoun **these** refers to **the flesh** and **the Spirit**. If if would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the flesh and the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-GAL	5	17	ukce	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1		Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul said in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	5	17	l0lu	figs-explicit	ἃ&θέλητε ταῦτα	1		This clause refers to the good **things** that Christians want to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those good things that you would desire to do as Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	18	cyud	figs-activepassive	Πνεύματι ἄγεσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Spirit leads you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	18	san8	figs-personification	οὐκ ἐστὲ ὑπὸ νόμον	1	not under the law	Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a ruler whose authority people had to live **under**. He means that Christians are not controlled by the requirements of **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how **under the law** is translated in [Romans 6:14](../../rom/06/14.md). Alternative translation: “the law does not control you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	5	18	esbf	grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον	1	not under the law	See how you translated **the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-GAL	5	19	alfa	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἔργα τῆς σαρκός & πορνεία, ἀκαθαρσία, ἀσέλγεια	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **works**, **sexual immorality**, **impurity**, and **licentiousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what the flesh does … being sexually immoral, being impure, being licentious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	19	yf2a	figs-personification	τὰ ἔργα τῆς σαρκός	1	the works of the sinful nature	Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who has **works**. He is referring to what a person does as a result of having a sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what people do because of their sinful natures” or “the things people do because they are sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	5	19	pu5b	figs-metaphor	τῆς σαρκός	1	the works of the sinful nature	See how you translated **flesh** in [verses 13](../05/13.md) and [16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	20	rgjl	figs-abstractnouns	εἰδωλολατρία, φαρμακεία, ἔχθραι, ἔρις, ζῆλοι, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, διχοστασίαι, αἱρέσεις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **idolatry**, **sorcery**, **hostilities**, **strife**, **jealousy**, **anger**, **rivalry**, **divisions**, and **factions**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “worshiping idols, practicing witchcraft, being hostile, striving with others, being jealous, angrily bursting out, causing people to divide, making factious groups” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	21	fdce	figs-abstractnouns	φθόνοι, μέθαι, κῶμοι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **envy**, **drunkenness**, and **drunken celebrations**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being envious, being drunk, being drunk while celebrating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	21	rs9b	figs-metaphor	οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν	1	inherit	Here Paul speaks of **the kingdom of God** as if it were property that a child could **inherit** from a parent when that parent dies. Paul uses the word **inherit** here to refer to being able to dwell in **the kingdom of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will not dwell in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	22	ejgc	figs-possession	ὁ&καρπὸς τοῦ Πνεύματός	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the fruit** that **the Spirit** gives to believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the fruit that the Spirit gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	5	22	hez3	figs-metaphor	ὁ&καρπὸς	1	the fruit of the Spirit is love … faith	Here, **fruit** refers to a result or outcome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the product” or “the result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	22	fsxn	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπη, χαρά, εἰρήνη, μακροθυμία, χρηστότης, ἀγαθωσύνη, πίστις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love**, **joy**, **peace**, **patience**, **kindness**, **goodness**, and **faithfulness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “acting lovingly, joyfully, peacefully, patiently, kindly, in a good manner, faithfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	22	famj	figs-explicit	εἰρήνη	1		Here, **peace** could mean: (1) a peaceful feeling. Alternate translation: “feeling peaceful” (2) a peaceful relationship with other people. Alternate translation: “peace with others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	23	wl7x	figs-abstractnouns	πραΰτης, ἐνκράτεια	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **gentleness**, and **self-control**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “acting gently, and controlling oneself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	24	l6ux	figs-personification	τὴν σάρκα ἐσταύρωσαν	1	have crucified the sinful nature with its passions and desires	Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person that believers **have crucified**. He means that Christians refuse to live according to their sinful natures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “refuse to live according to their sinful natures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-GAL	5	24	e347	figs-metaphor	τὴν σάρκα	1		See how you translated the same use of **the flesh** in [verse 13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	5	24	r86y	figs-explicit	τοῖς παθήμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις	1		These phrases specifically refer to the **passions** and **desires** of **the flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “its passion and desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	24	cgu0	figs-abstractnouns	τοῖς παθήμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **passions**, and **desires**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what it is passionate about and what it desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	5	25	h9hd	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	If we live by the Spirit	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-GAL	5	25	xvcl	figs-activepassive	ζῶμεν Πνεύματι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Spirit causes us to be alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	5	25	ldm7	figs-explicit	ζῶμεν	1		Here, **live** refers to a Christian’s spirit being alive, which will result in that person living forever with God in heaven. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we live spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	5	25	sq7b	figs-metaphor	Πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν	1	walk by the Spirit	See how you translated **walk by the Spirit** in [verse 16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	intro	bv8h			0		# Galatians 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter concludes Paul’s letter. His final words address some additional issues that concerned him about the Galatian believers.<br><br>### Brothers<br><br>Paul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them “brothers” in [verses 1](../06/01.md) and [18[(../06/18.md).<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### New Creation<br><br>Someone who becomes Christian is a new creation that is united with Christ ([6:15](../06/15.md); [2 Corinthians 5:17](../../2co/05/17.md)). Christians have been given new way of living that will result in eternal life. This is more significant than a person’s ancestry or attempts to obey the laws God gave the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Flesh<br><br>Paul uses the word “flesh” in a variety of ways throughout this letter. In this chapter he frequently uses “flesh” to refer to sinful human nature. He contrasts “flesh” with the Spirit in [verse 8](../06/08.md). However, he also uses “flesh” to refer to a person’s physical body or outward appearance in [verses 12–13](../06/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
-GAL	6	1	ss7l	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Brothers	See how you translated the same use of **Brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	6	1	vm8f	figs-genericnoun	ἄνθρωπος	1	if someone	Here, **a man** does not refer to a particular man, but to any believer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anyone among you” or “one of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-GAL	6	1	vts8	figs-explicit	προλημφθῇ ἄνθρωπος ἔν τινι παραπτώματι	1	if someone is caught in any trespass	This could refer to: (1) a believer discovering that another believer is committing a sin. Alternate translation: “a man is discovered while committing any trespass” (2) a person who is overcome by temptation and sins. Alternate translation: “a man is overwhelmed by temptation and commits any trespass” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	1	xmbm	figs-abstractnouns	ἔν τινι παραπτώματι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespass**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “trespassing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	6	1	t4rm	figs-explicit	οἱ πνευματικοὶ	1	you who are spiritual	Here, **the spiritual** refers to spiritually immature believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the spiritually mature ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	1	tr5r	figs-possession	πνεύματι πραΰτητος	1	in a spirit of gentleness	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that is characterized by **gentleness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a gentle spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	6	1	zudd	figs-explicit	πνεύματι	1	in a spirit of gentleness	Here, **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or emotional state. It does not refer to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	1	jrve		σκοπῶν	1		Alternate translation: “paying careful attention to” or “looking out for”
-GAL	6	1	rrg9	figs-youcrowd	σεαυτόν	1	Be concerned about yourself	Paul uses the singular pronoun **yourself** here to refer to all his Christian readers. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of **yourself** in your translation. Alternate translation: “yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
-GAL	6	1	ljx6	figs-activepassive	μὴ καὶ σὺ πειρασθῇς	1	so you also may not be tempted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “lest that person’s sin tempts you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	6	2	l0mz	figs-metaphor	ἀλλήλων τὰ βάρη βαστάζετε	1		Paul speaks of the spiritual struggles of immature believers as if they were **burdens** that a person could **carry**. He means that mature Christians should patiently help spiritually weak Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help one another overcome spiritual weakness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	2	jfh0	figs-abstractnouns	ἀλλήλων τὰ βάρη	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **burdens**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what burdens one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	6	2	i7bf	figs-idiom	ἀναπληρώσετε	1		Here, **fulfill** refers to obeying completely. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you will completely obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	6	2	m6jz	figs-explicit	τὸν νόμον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here, **the law of Christ** most likely refers to Christ’s command to love one another in [John 13:34](../../jhn/13/34.md), which Paul also refers to in [verse 14](../05/14.md). It does not refer to a set of rules or the laws that God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Christ commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	3	v6ts	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For if	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants his readers to obey what he commanded in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	6	3	eure	figs-gendernotations	δοκεῖ & φρεναπατᾷ ἑαυτόν	1		Although the words **himself** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	6	3	m4wk	figs-idiom	εἶναί τι	1	he is something	Here, **to be something** refers to someone arrogantly thinking that he is better than other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be better than others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	6	3	zz1g	figs-idiom	μηδὲν ὤν	1		Here, **being nothing** refers to someone not being better than other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not being better than others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	6	4	wo1z	figs-123person	τὸ&ἔργον ἑαυτοῦ δοκιμαζέτω ἕκαστος, καὶ τότε εἰς ἑαυτὸν μόνον τὸ καύχημα ἕξει, καὶ οὐκ εἰς τὸν ἕτερον	1		In this verse Paul is addressing his readers in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person instead. Alternate translation: “let each one of you examine your own work, and then you will have reason to boast in yourself and not in someone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-GAL	6	4	kubv	figs-gendernotations	τὸ&ἑαυτὸν&ἕξει	1		Although the words **his**, **he**, and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	6	4	umjq	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ&ἔργον ἑαυτοῦ&τὸ καύχημα ἕξει	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **work** and **reason**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the things he does himself … he can reasonably boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	6	4	pb3m	figs-metaphor	εἰς ἑαυτὸν&εἰς τὸν ἕτερον	1		Paul uses **himself** and **someone else** as if they were something that a person could **boast** inside of. He means that people **boast** about themselves or others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “about himself … about someone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	5	euhw	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants his readers to obey what he commanded in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	6	5	ee8v	figs-metaphor	τὸ ἴδιον φορτίον βαστάσει	1	each one will carry his own load	The phrase **carry his own burden** could mean: (1) people have their own responsibilities and tasks. Alternate translation: “each person must do the work that God has given him” or “each person is responsible for his own work” (2) people are responsible for their own weaknesses and sins. Alternate translation: “each person is responsible for their own sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	5	hwxg	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ἴδιον φορτίον	1	each one will carry his own load	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **burden**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what burdens him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	6	6	ggkk	figs-123person	κοινωνείτω & ὁ κατηχούμενος τὸν λόγον, τῷ κατηχοῦντι, ἐν πᾶσιν ἀγαθοῖς	1		In this verse Paul is addressing his readers in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person instead. Alternate translation: “let you who are being taught the word share in all good things with the one who is teaching you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-GAL	6	6	irxx	figs-activepassive	ὁ κατηχούμενος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom someone is teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	6	6	c1rs	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1		Here, **the word** refers to what God had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	6	6	n26e	figs-euphemism	ἐν πᾶσιν ἀγαθοῖς	1		Here, **all good things** is a polite way of referring to material possessions, including money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to these things or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in all that one possesses” or “in all possessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
-GAL	6	7	o9sk	figs-activepassive	μὴ πλανᾶσθε, Θεὸς οὐ μυκτηρίζεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not deceive yourselves. No one can mock God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	6	7	tm7g	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **for** indicates that what follows is a reason why **God is not mocked**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	6	7	gii9	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος, τοῦτο καὶ θερίσει	1		Although **man** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person … that the person will also reap” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-GAL	6	7	x5pi	figs-metaphor	ὃ&ἐὰν σπείρῃ ἄνθρωπος, τοῦτο καὶ θερίσει	1	for whatever a man plants, that he will also gather in	Here, **sow** refers to doing things that will have consequences, and **reap** represents experiencing those consequences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “just as a farmer gathers in the fruit of the seeds he plants, so everyone experiences the results of whatever they do” or “everyone receives the results of whatever they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	8	ejbf	figs-exmetaphor	σπείρων εἰς τὴν σάρκα ἑαυτοῦ&σπείρων εἰς τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		Paul continues the metaphor from the previous verse of a farmer **sowing** seeds and harvesting crops. The word **sowing** refers to doing deeds that will have consequences. Here, **sowing to his own flesh** refers to a person doing sinful actions in order to satisfy his sinful nature, and **sowing to the Spirit** refers to a person doing good actions in order to please the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “doings things to satisfy his sinful nature … doing things to please the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-GAL	6	8	p9gl	figs-metaphor	σάρκα&σαρκὸς	1		See how you translated the same use of **flesh** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	8	lzz8	figs-metaphor	θερίσει&θερίσει	1		In this verse **reap** represents experiencing the consequences of doing something. See how you translated the same use of **reap** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	8	dge9	figs-explicit	φθοράν	1	will gather in destruction	Here, **destruction** refers to experiencing punishment forever in hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eternal destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	8	cc72	figs-abstractnouns	θερίσει φθοράν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	6	9	xgi4	figs-exclusive	μὴ ἐνκακῶμεν&θερίσομεν	1		When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the Galatian believers so **we** would be inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	6	9	xruj	figs-explicit	τὸ&καλὸν	1		See how you translated **good** in [4:18](../04/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	9	u77c		καιρῷ&ἰδίῳ	1	for at the right time	Alternate translation: “at the proper time”
-GAL	6	9	u8fx	figs-declarative	μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι	1		Paul is using a statement to give a condition. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for a condition. Alternate translation: “if not becoming weary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-GAL	6	9	hw39	figs-metaphor	θερίσομεν	1		See how you translated **reap** in [verse 7](../06/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	10	ax66	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα οὖν	1	So then	**So then** indicates that what follows in this verse is the concluding result of what Paul has said in [verses 1–9](../06/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Because all these things are true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	6	10	gih4	figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν&ἐργαζώμεθα	1		When Paul says **we** he is speaking of himself and the Galatian believers so we would be inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-GAL	6	10	yjpq	figs-explicit	τὸ ἀγαθὸν	1		See how you translated **good** in [4:18](../04/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	10	e8qt	figs-nominaladj	πάντας	1		Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to indicate **all** people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-GAL	6	10	jz9i	figs-metaphor	τοὺς οἰκείους τῆς πίστεως	1	those who belong to the household of faith	Here Paul refers to Christians as if they were a **household of the faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who are Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	10	qz9c	figs-explicit	τῆς πίστεως	1	those who belong to the household of faith	Here, **the faith** refers to believing in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that has faith in Jesus” or “that believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	11	i7ap	figs-imperative	ἴδετε	1		**See** here is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please observe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-GAL	6	11	d6rk	figs-explicit	τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί	1	with my own hand	This could mean: (1) Paul had someone write most of this letter as Paul told him what to write, but Paul himself wrote this last part of the letter. Alternate translation: “with my own hand in the last part of this letter” (2) Paul wrote the whole letter himself. Alternate translation: “with my own hand in this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	12	kmd7	figs-explicit	εὐπροσωπῆσαι	1	make a good impression	Paul’s readers would have understood that he was referring to making **a good impression** on legalistic Jews who did not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to make a good impression on the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	12	r5p1	figs-metonymy	ἐν σαρκί	1	in the flesh	Here, **the flesh** refers to someone’s outward physical appearance, specifically the appearance of someone who has been circumcised in order to impress the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with regard to physical appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	6	12	hnse	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	in the flesh	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	6	12	n8mc	figs-activepassive	μὴ διώκωνται	1	in the flesh	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that the Jews might do the action. Alternate translation: “the Jews might not persecute them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	6	12	jd4x	figs-metonymy	τῷ σταυρῷ τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	the cross	Here, **the cross** refers to believing in Christ’s sacrificial death on **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for believing in what Christ Jesus did when he died on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	6	13	xod7	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	6	13	cgi6	figs-activepassive	οἱ περιτετμημένοι&ὑμᾶς περιτέμνεσθαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones who have had a person circumcise them … a person to circumcise you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	6	13	xtsq	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-GAL	6	13	q2uh	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ σαρκὶ	1		See how you translated the same use of **flesh** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	6	14	yek3	figs-exclamations	ἐμοὶ&μὴ γένοιτο	1		The phrase **may it never be** is an exclamation that communicates a strong desire against doing something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this meaning. Alternate translation: “may I absolutely never” or “may I certainly never” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-GAL	6	14	p2zz	grammar-connect-exceptions	ἐμοὶ&μὴ γένοιτο καυχᾶσθαι, εἰ μὴ	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “may it ever only be to me to boast” or “may I only ever boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
-GAL	6	14	ul40	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ σταυρῷ	1		Here Paul speaks of **the cross** as if it were a location someone could **boast** **in**. He means that he boasts with reference to **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when referring to the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	14	evgd	figs-metonymy	τῷ σταυρῷ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here, **the cross** refers to Christ’s sacrificial death on **the cross**. Paul uses **the cross** here in a slightly different way than he did in [verse 12](../06/12.md). See how you translated the same use of **the cross** in [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “what our Lord Jesus Christ did when he died on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	6	14	vsa8	figs-activepassive	ἐμοὶ κόσμος ἐσταύρωται, κἀγὼ κόσμῳ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified the world to me, and me to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-GAL	6	14	miwn	figs-metonymy	κόσμος&κόσμῳ	1		Here, **the world** could refer to: (1) the entire world system, which is naturally hostile to God. This **world** operates according to the “elementary principles” ([4:3](../04/03.md)) that exist during this “present evil age” ([1:4](../01/04.md)). Alternate translation: “this world system that opposes God … to this world system that opposes God” (2) the system of values that people share who do not honor God, which is how John uses **the world** in [1 John 2:15](../../1jn/02/15.md). Alternate translation: “what people value in the world … to what people value in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-GAL	6	14	lpr2	figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ κόσμος ἐσταύρωται	1		Here Paul speaks of **the world** no longer influencing him as if **the world** were a dead man who had been **crucified**. Just as a dead person cannot directly influence anyone, so the world could not influence Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the world does not influence me” or “it is as if the world is dead to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	14	v2qs	figs-ellipsis	κἀγὼ κόσμῳ	1	I to the world	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and I have been crucified to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	6	14	zhnc	figs-metaphor	κἀγὼ κόσμῳ	1	I to the world	This could mean: (1) the same as the previous clause, but stated in reverse order for emphasis. Alternate translation: “and I am not influenced by the world” (2) the opposite of the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and I do not influence the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	15	pfcn	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul only boasts “in the cross of our Lord Jesus Christ,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I may boast in the cross because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	6	15	ck7p	figs-idiom	οὔτε γὰρ περιτομή τὶ ἐστιν, οὔτε ἀκροβυστία	1		Here, **anything** refers to being important to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither circumcision is important to God, nor uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-GAL	6	15	rd5c	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ καινὴ κτίσις	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but a new creation is something important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL	6	15	n6n7	figs-metaphor	καινὴ κτίσις	1	a new creation	Here, **a new creation** refers to the whole process when someone trusts in Jesus and the Holy Spirit gives that person a new life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how **new creation** is translated in [2 Corinthians 5:17](../../2co/05/17.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit giving someone a new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	16	wrnk	figs-metaphor	στοιχήσουσιν	1		See how you translated the similar use of **walk** in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	16	evn3	figs-explicit	τῷ κανόνι τούτῳ	1		Here, **this standard** refers to what Paul said in the previous verse, specifically the importance of someone being a “new creation.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as new creations” or “as those whom the Holy Spirit has given new lives”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	16	n987	translate-blessing	εἰρήνη ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, καὶ ἔλεος, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Paul adds a blessing here. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may they and the Israel of God experience peace and mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
-GAL	6	16	auo7	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνη ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, καὶ ἔλεος, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **peace** and **mercy**, you could express the ideas in a different way. See how you translated **peace** in [1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “may God make them feel peaceful and be merciful to them and to the Israel of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	6	16	b4al	figs-explicit	καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	peace and mercy be upon them, even upon the Israel of God	This could refer to: (1) Jews who believe in Jesus, in which case **and** functions as it usually does to connect two things. Alternate translation: “and upon the Jewish believers of God” (2) everyone who believes in Jesus, in which case **and** indicates that **them** refers to the same group of people as **the Israel of God**. Alternate translation: “that is, upon God’s people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	17	cidu	grammar-connect-logic-result	τοῦ λοιποῦ, κόπους μοι μηδεὶς παρεχέτω; ἐγὼ γὰρ τὰ στίγματα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματί μου βαστάζω	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because I carry in my body the marks of Jesus, from now on let no one cause me trouble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-GAL	6	17	cz8a	figs-explicit	κόπους μοι	1	trouble me	Here, **trouble** refers to the distress that some of the Galatian Christians caused for Paul because of the problems that he wrote about in this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “trouble me with regard to these issues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	17	ww8m	figs-abstractnouns	κόπους μοι μηδεὶς παρεχέτω	1	trouble me	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trouble**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “let no one trouble me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	6	17	ahlc	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & τὰ στίγματα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματί μου βαστάζω	1		Here Paul speaks about **the marks** on his **body** as if they were objects that he carried around. He means that **the marks** remained on his **body** everywhere he went. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the marks of Jesus are always on my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL	6	17	j729	figs-possession	τὰ στίγματα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	for I carry on my body the marks of Jesus	Here, **the marks of Jesus** refers to the scars on Paul’s body that were made by people beating him because he taught about **Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the scars I received because I taught the truth about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-GAL	6	18	ch05	translate-blessing	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν	1		As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Galatian believers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May your spirit experience kindness from our Lord Jesus Christ” or “I pray that your spirit will have grace from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
-GAL	6	18	m7mj	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ χάρις	1		See how you translated **grace** in [1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-GAL	6	18	r9zk	figs-genericnoun	τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν	1		Jesus is speaking of the spirits of his readers in general, not of one particular **spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “your spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-GAL	6	18	wywe	figs-explicit	τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν	1		Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “you” (2) the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Alternative translation: “your inner being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-GAL	6	18	pk25	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated the same use of **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tn_GAL.tsv b/tn_GAL.tsv
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..67600c3dac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tn_GAL.tsv
@@ -0,0 +1,851 @@
+Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
+front:intro	i6u9				0	# Introduction to Galatians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Galatians\n\n1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).\n1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).\n1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).\n1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other’s burdens (5:1-6:10).\n1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?\n\nPaul wrote the book of Galatians. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus and establishing churches.\n\nIt is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some Bible scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus and establish churches. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.\n\n### What is the Book of Galatians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. In the book of Galatians Paul explains that people are saved as result of believing in Jesus and not as a result of obeying the law of Moses and he proves this by using various Old Testament passages to illustrate this truth. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Galatians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Galatia.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What does it mean to “live like Jews” (2:14)?\n\nTo “live like Jews” means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people who taught that it was necessary to follow the law of Moses in addition to believing in Jesus were called “Judaizers.”\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How did Paul use the terms “law” and “grace” in the Book of Galatians?\n\nThese terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called “the law of Christ.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” and “in Christ Jesus?” \n\nPaul uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” or the related phrase “in Christ Jesus” very frequently in this letter. This expression occurs with a metaphorical meaning in 1:22; 2:4,17; 3:14, 26, 28; and 5:6. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the people who believe in him. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to identify that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. Sometimes when Paul uses the phrase “in Christ” he intends a different meaning. See, for example, 2:16 where Paul says “we also believed in Christ Jesus, so that we might be justified by faith in Christ” and see 2:17 where Paul spoke of Christ being the object of faith when he said “when we seek for God to justify us in Christ.” See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\nPlease see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?\n* “Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes” (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, “[so] that ye should not obey the truth.” Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1:intro	f3n5				0	# Galatians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was “not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones.” Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Heresy\n\nGod eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])\n\n### Paul’s qualifications\n\nSome people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But Paul still needed God to save him through believing in Jesus. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “You are turning so quickly to a different gospel”\n\nThe Book of Galatians is one of Paul’s earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:1	o4ns			Παῦλος	1	Here, Paul is introducing himself as the author of this letter. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Use that here. Alternate translation: “This letter is from me, Paul”
+1:1	uhhp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	Παῦλος	1	Paul is speaking of himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “This letter is from me, Paul” or “I, Paul” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
+1:1	m4ss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἀπ’ ἀνθρώπων, οὐδὲ δι’ ἀνθρώπου	1	# General Information:\n\nIf your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate this phrase using only one negative word. Alternate translation: “not from men or through man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+1:1	rcnw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἀπ’ ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, the word **from** indicates source. The phrase **not from men** means that humans are not the source of Paul’s apostleship and that he was not commissioned or appointed an apostle by humans. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “not through the commissioning of humans” or “not through human commission” or “not sent out by people” or “not because I was appointed and sent by a group of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:1	yqma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων & ἀνθρώπου	1	Although the terms **men** and **man** are masculine, Paul uses them here in a generic sense to refer to humans in general. Alternate translation: “humans … humans” or “people … a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1:1	k2dw			δι’ ἀνθρώπου, ἀλλὰ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς	1	Both times that the word **through** is used in this verse it indicates agency/means and refers to the agency/means by which Paul’s was commissioned as an apostle. Choose the best word in your language to indicate the meaning of the word **through** here. Alternate translation: “through the agency of man, but through the agency of Jesus Christ and God the Father”
+1:1	pvdp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word **but** introduces a contrast between different potential agents or means of Paul’s commission. The word **but** is introducing a contrast between Paul’s apostleship being **not through man** but rather being **through Jesus Christ and God the Father**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+1:1	fyu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	The phrase **the one having raised him from the dead** gives further information about **God the Father**. It is not making a distinction between **God the Father** and **the one having raised him from the dead** as if they are two separate entities. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “God the Father who is the same one who made Jesus Christ live again after he died” or “God the Father who caused Jesus Christ to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+1:1	wmlj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς	1	Here, the phrase **the Father** could be (1) a general title for God which identifies him as the first person in the Christian Trinity. If you choose this option then you should not define whose **Father** God is in your translation but rather you should use a more an expression like the ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) (2) referring to God’s relationship to those who believe in Christ. Alternate translation: “God our Father”
+1:1	w3gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from among the people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1:1	g5as		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Here, the phrase **the dead** could be a figurative way of referring to a place, in which case it would be referring to “the place of the dead” or “the realm of the dead.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the place of the dead” or “from the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:2	d737		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Here, although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it in a generic sense to refer to fellow Christians, which includes both men and women. Paul views all those who believe in Jesus, as members of one spiritual family, with God as their heavenly Father. If your readers would misunderstand the use of **brothers** in this context, you can indicate explicitly what it means as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1:2	wmd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Γαλατίας	1	Here, the word **Galatia** could refer to: (1) the Roman political province called **Galatia**. Alternate translation: “in the province of Galatia” or (2) the geographical region known as **Galatia**. Alternate translation: “in the region of Galatia” If it would help your readers you could state explicitly what the word **Galatia** refers to here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:2	aa9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς Γαλατίας	1	Paul uses the possessive form here to describe churches that are in Roman political province called **Galatia** or in the geographical region known as **Galatia**. If this use of the possessive form is not clear in your language, you could clarify the meaning using a form that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in the province of Galatia” or “in the region of Galatia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1:3	nxtz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη	1	This is a common blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
+1:3	psjz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **Grace** and **peace**, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace** and **peace** with adjectives such as “gracious” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “May God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and make you peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:3	nykr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμῖν	1	Here, the word **you** is plural and refers to the Galatians. Unless noted otherwise, all instances of “you” and “your” in this letter refer to the Galatians and are plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+1:3	c1xf			Θεοῦ Πατρὸς	1	See how you chose to translate the phrase **God the Father** in [1:1](../01/01.md).
+1:3	eivd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here, the word **our** refers to Paul, the believers in Galatia, and all believers in Jesus and so is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. In this book, unless otherwise stated, the word “our” refers to Paul, the believers in Galatia, and all believers and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1:4	onj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τοῦ δόντος ἑαυτὸν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν, ὅπως ἐξέληται ἡμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος πονηροῦ	1	The phrase **the one having given himself for our sins so that he might deliver us from the present evil age** gives us further information about “our Lord Jesus Christ.” It is not making a distinction between them as if they were two different entities. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one having given himself for our sins so that he might deliver us from the present evil age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+1:4	yk9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1	Here, **sins** figuratively refers to the punishment for sin and the phrase **for our sins** refers to Christ giving his life “as a substitution for the punishment that our sins deserved.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “as a substitution for the punishment that our sins deserved” or “to take the punishment we deserved because of our sins” or “to take the punishment for our sins” or “as a substitution for the punishment that our sins deserved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:4	f2pm			ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν	1	See the note on **our** in [1:3](../01/03.md).
+1:4	haib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sins**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “sinful,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:4	d8m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὅπως	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Christ gave himself for our sins. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+1:4	f6d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος πονηροῦ	1	Here, the phrase **the present evil age**, refers not only to a time period but also refers to the sinful attitudes and actions that characterize **the present evil age**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from this present time that is dominated by sinfulness” or “from this present evil age with it’s evil attitudes and desires” or “from the evil powers at work in the world today” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:4	mg01		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	The phrase **and Father** gives further information about **our God**. It is not making a distinction between **God** and **Father** as if they are two separate entities. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these words more clear. Alternate translation: “of our God who is our Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+1:5	y7mj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δόξα	1	The phrase **be the glory** is an expression of praise. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “praise”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:5	miju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	ἀμήν	1	**Amen** is a Hebrew word. Paul spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. He assumes that they know that it means “so be it” or “yes indeed.” In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds in your language. If your readers would not know what **Amen** means, you could also explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Amen, which means, ‘So be it!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+1:6	f74p			θαυμάζω	1	Alternate translation: “I am surprised” or “I am shocked”
+1:6	v438		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὕτως ταχέως, μετατίθεσθε	1	Here, the phrase **turning away** means “to desert” and refers to turning ones heart or mind away from believing and following something. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are so quickly deserting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:6	ficf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μετατίθεσθε	1	The phrase **you are turning away** is in the present tense and is portraying the action of **turning away** as in process, but not yet completed. Make sure that you express this phrase in your language in a way that shows that the Galatians **turning away** is currently happening but not complete. (Paul is writing this letter in order to encourage the Galatians to not turn away to **a different gospel**).
+1:6	cw1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὕτως ταχέως	1	Here, the phrase **so quickly** means that the Galatians were turning away from faith in the true gospel shortly after they accepted it. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the true gospel so soon after accepting it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:6	ht94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τοῦ καλέσαντος ὑμᾶς	1	Here, the phrase **the one** refers to “God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and from God, who is the one who has called you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:6	qy93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καλέσαντος	1	Here, the phrase **called** refers to being “chosen” by God. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:6	ghhs			ἐν	1	Here, the word **in** could (1) refer to the Galatians being called “into” the sphere or realm of grace. Alternate translation: “into” or “to live in” (2) refer to the means by which the Galatians were saved. Alternate translation: “by” or “through”
+1:6	cizk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάριτι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “graciously”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:7	l5ep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄλλο	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “another gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1:7	rg69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	εἰ μή τινές εἰσιν οἱ ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ θέλοντες μεταστρέψαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If, in your language, the use of the word **except** makes it appear as if Paul is making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “instead certain people are causing you trouble and want to pervert the gospel of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
+1:7	wnfe			τινές	1	Alternate translation: “certain people”
+1:7	kswu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trouble**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “troubling,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “troubling you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:7	tec2			μεταστρέψαι	1	Alternate translation: “to twist the truth of” or “to change”
+1:7	k9d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	By using the possessive form here, Paul is either using it to: (1) describe the gospel that is about Christ, in which case the possessive form is being used to describe the content of the gospel. Alternate translation: “the gospel about Christ” (2) designate Christ as the one who proclaimed the gospel message he is referring to in which case Paul is referring to the gospel message that Christ preached. Alternate translation: “the gospel that Christ proclaimed” or “the gospel that Christ preached” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1:8	rltx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	καὶ ἐὰν ἡμεῖς ἢ ἄγγελος ἐξ οὐρανοῦ εὐαγγελίζηται ὑμῖν παρ’ ὃ εὐηγγελισάμεθα ὑμῖν, ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1	The word **if** introduces a hypothetical situation. Paul is using a hypothetical situation to warn the Galatians against any teaching that is contrary to the original gospel message that they were taught. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “if it were to happen that we or an angel from heaven might proclaim to you a gospel other than the one we proclaimed to you, let whoever would do that be cursed” or “suppose it were to happen that we or an angel from heaven might proclaim to you a gospel other than the one we proclaimed to you, let whoever would do that be cursed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1:8	wnx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	When Paul says **we**, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1:8	ebyi			ἡμεῖς	1	Alternate translation: “I or my co-laborers in the gospel”
+1:8	f1ef			εὐαγγελίζηται ὑμῖν	1	Alternate translation: “proclaim to you a gospel message” or “a message of good news”
+1:8	s5uq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρ’ ὃ εὐηγγελισάμεθα	1	Here, the phrase **the one** refers to the gospel message that Paul and his co-laborers had proclaimed to the Galatians. If your readers might misunderstand this you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “different from the gospel we proclaimed” or “different from the message we proclaimed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:8	xb2c			ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1	If your language has a common way of asking God to curse someone, or of calling down a curse on someone, and it would be appropriate to use in this context, consider using it here.
+1:8	kv9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of someone being **cursed**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “curse.” Alternate translation: “let God curse him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:8	pifk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “let God curse him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:8	g7zz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1	Although the term **him** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “let God curse that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1:9	anxe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	προειρήκαμεν	1	When Paul says **we**, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1:9	h1ht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις ὑμᾶς εὐαγγελίζεται	1	The word **If** introduces a hypothetical situation. Paul is using a hypothetical situation to warn the Galatians against any teaching that is contrary to the original gospel message that they were taught. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “If it were to happen that someone proclaims to you a gospel” or “Suppose it were to happen that someone proclaims to you a gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1:9	i2wk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρ’ ὃ	1	See how you translated the phrase **other than the one** in [1:8](../01/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:9	mrv9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1	See how you translated the phrase **let him be cursed** in [1:8](../01/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:9	eta3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνάθεμα ἔστω	1	Although the term **him** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how you translated the phrase **let him be cursed** in [1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “let God curse that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1:10	ifod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** is being used to introduce Paul’s argument against an implied assertion that he altered the content of his gospel message in order to make it more acceptable to people. If it would help your readers, you could express the implied assertion explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+1:10	b2vc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἄρτι γὰρ ἀνθρώπους πείθω ἢ τὸν Θεόν? ἢ ζητῶ ἀνθρώποις ἀρέσκειν	1	By using these two rhetorical questions Paul is not asking the Galatians for information, but is using the question form for emphasis and to engage his readers thinking. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “For I do not seek to persuade men, but instead I only seek the approval of God! I am not seeking to please men!” or “For I do not seek the approval of men, but instead I only seek the approval of God! I am not seeking to please men!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1:10	xhrn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄρτι & ἀνθρώπους πείθω ἢ τὸν Θεόν? ἢ ζητῶ ἀνθρώποις ἀρέσκειν? εἰ ἔτι ἀνθρώποις ἤρεσκον	1	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women, and refers to “people” in general. Alternate translation: “do I now persuade people, or God? Or do I seek to please people? If I were still pleasing people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1:10	fl3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ ἔτι ἀνθρώποις ἤρεσκον, Χριστοῦ δοῦλος οὐκ ἂν ἤμην	1	The word **if** introduces a hypothetical condition. Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatians. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation or if it would help your readers you can state Paul’s meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “I am not still trying to please men because I am a servant of Christ” or “If I were still pleasing people, then I would not be serving Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+1:11	xve4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** is used to introduce a supporting statement that further supports and gives reason for Paul’s prior statement. Use a form that would be natural in your language for introducing a statement that supports a prior statement. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+1:11	cnic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1:11	o5cu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν ὑπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that I proclaimed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:11	hew1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women, and refers to “humans.” Alternate translation: “did not come from a human” or “is not a human message” or “is not a message that people made up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1:12	zfxj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** could be being used to introduce: (1) the grounds or basis for Paul’s assertion in [1:11](../01/11.md), in which case what follows the word **For** is support for what Paul said in [1:11](../01/11.md). Use a form that would be natural for introducing a statement which gives supporting evidence. Alternate translation: “In support of my claim that the gospel I proclaimed is not according to man, I want you to know that” (2) a statement which explains and builds on Paul’s assertion in [1:11](../01/11.md). Use a form that would be natural for introducing a statement which further clarifies and explains a prior statement. Alternate translation: “To explain further, I want you to know” or “That is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+1:12	kdol		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐδὲ & ἐγὼ παρὰ ἀνθρώπου παρέλαβον αὐτό, οὔτε ἐδιδάχθην	1	The phrase **I did not receive it from man** and the phrase **nor was I taught it** mean basically the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I did not receive the gospel that I proclaim from any person” or “no human being taught me the gospel that I proclaim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1:12	er9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women, and refers to “humans.” See how you translated the word **man** in [1:11](../01/11.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “people” or “humans” or “a human source” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1:12	y2am		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐδιδάχθην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:12	hlg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτό & ἐδιδάχθην	1	Here, both occurrences of the word **it** refer back to “the gospel” which Paul “proclaimed” which he mentioned in [1:11](../01/11.md). If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gospel that I proclaimed … was I taught the gospel that I proclaimed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:12	qohz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐδιδάχθην	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “was I taught it by any person” or “was I taught it by man” or “was I taught it by a human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1:12	g1o6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	What follows the word **but** is in contrast to the phrases **receive it from man** and **taught it**. In contrast to Paul receiving the message he proclaimed from a human source or being **taught it** Paul received it from a divine source. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “rather” or “instead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+1:12	leqs			δι’	1	Alternate translation: “through a”
+1:12	uybt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀποκαλύψεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:12	wed1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δι’ ἀποκαλύψεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Paul could be using the possessive form here to mean: (1) that God revealed Jesus Christ to Paul. This would mean that God is the one who did the revealing and Jesus Christ is the one who God revealed. See the phrase “to reveal his Son in me” in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “God revealed Jesus Christ to me” or “God made me know the gospel when he showed Jesus Christ to me” (2) that it was Jesus Christ who made the revelation to Paul. Alternate translation: “by what Jesus Christ revealed to me” (3) both option 1 and 2 together. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ revealed himself to me and taught me the gospel about himself” or “Jesus Christ revealed himself to me and taught me the gospel concerning himself”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+1:12	nee4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ δι’ ἀποκαλύψεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I received it by a revelation of Jesus Christ” or “but I was taught it by a revelation of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1:13	f3gl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐμὴν ἀναστροφήν ποτε	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **manner** and **life**, you could express the same idea with a verbal phrase such as “how I formerly lived”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “how I formerly lived” or “how I formerly conducted myself” or “how I formerly behaved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:13	r8ol		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ Ἰουδαϊσμῷ	1	Here, the phrase **in Judaism** refers to following the Jewish religious guidelines. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “following the Jewish religion” or “following the Jewish religious guidelines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:13	ydx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν	1	The phrase **beyond measure** is an idiom meaning “excessively.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “excessively” or “to an extreme degree” or “intensely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:14	vtug		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ Ἰουδαϊσμῷ	1	See how you translated the phrase **in Judaism** in [1:13](../01/13.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “in the Jewish religion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:14	aecd			τῷ γένει	1	Alternate translation: “nation”
+1:14	gdwi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ γένει μου	1	The word **race** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “my ethnic group the Jews” or “my people the Jews” or “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+1:14	bcdo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν πατρικῶν μου	1	Here, the word **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” If your readers would not understand what **fathers** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “of my ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:15	w6zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what was expected. What would be expected is that Paul would continue thinking and acting according to the way he formerly did as described in [1:14](../01/14.md). Instead, God **called** Paul, and as the next verse says, God revealed Jesus to him, so that he might teach the Gentiles about Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+1:15	ofqm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ	1	Here, the phrase **the one** refers to God. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:15	qu8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὅτε & εὐδόκησεν ὁ, ἀφορίσας με ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός μου, καὶ καλέσας διὰ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	The statement **having set me apart from the womb of my mother and having called {me} through his grace** gives us further information about the **the one** (God). It is not making a distinction. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “when God, who is the one who set me apart from my mother’s womb and called me through his grace, was pleased” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+1:15	iyc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός μου	1	The phrase **from the womb of my mother** is a Hebrew idiom which means either “from the day of my birth” or “from before birth.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from the day I was born” or “from before I was born.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:15	wd26		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καλέσας	1	Here, the word **called** means “to choose and summon.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having chosen and summoned me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:15	wlph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χάριτος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:16	l97h			ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ	1	The phrase **reveal his Son in me** could mean: (1) that God revealed his Son “to” Paul and refer to God revealing to Paul who Jesus really was so that Paul had an inward knowledge of who Jesus really was. Alternate translation: “to reveal to me his Son” (2) that God revealed his Son to others “through” Paul. Alternate translation: “to reveal his Son to others through me” or “to reveal his Son to others by me”
+1:16	z800		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. After the phrase **so that** Paul states the purpose for which God revealed his Son to Paul, namely so that he **might preach him among the Gentiles**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+1:16	xx4c			εὐαγγελίζωμαι αὐτὸν	1	Alternate translation: “I might proclaim the good news about God’s Son”
+1:16	qme5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σαρκὶ καὶ αἵματι	1	Paul refers figuratively to “human beings” by naming a few of the things that a human being is made of, specifically **flesh and blood**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “any human being” or “any person” or “anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:17	qh88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀνῆλθον εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	**Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “come” rather than **go** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did I come up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1:17	w82a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	What follows the word **Instead** is in contrast to what was expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+1:17	zqih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀπῆλθον εἰς	1	Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1:18	c7gb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	ἔπειτα	1	The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. Use a natural form in your language for indicating this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
+1:18	rej5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀνῆλθον εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	**Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+1:19	av43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	ἕτερον & τῶν ἀποστόλων οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ Ἰάκωβον	1	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only other apostles I saw were James” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
+1:20	d9yv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	**behold** is an exclamation word which is used to draw attention to the words that come next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “pay attention to this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+1:20	h3cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ ψεύδομαι	1	Here, Paul uses a phrase that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am telling you the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+1:20	pp11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the phrase **before God** is an oath. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an oath from your language that would be appropriate in this context or you could make it clear in your translation that Paul is making an oath. Alternate translation: “I solemnly testify before God” or “in God’s presence I testify” or “I swear with God as my witness” or “I swear before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:21	ny6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	ἔπειτα ἦλθον εἰς	1	The word **then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events Paul has just described in [1:18-19](../01/18.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase or by expressing the meaning in some other way that is natural to your readers. Alternate translation: “After I left Jerusalem I went to” or “After that I went to” or “Afterwards I went to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
+1:22	y6l4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἤμην & ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “none of the people in the churches of Judea that are in Christ had ever met me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:22	wleq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἤμην & ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Paul uses the main feature of his appearance, his **face**, to refer figuratively to seeing his entire person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:22	sr0y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union believers have with Christ and here it is specifically describing/modifying **the churches of Judea**. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe what the phrase “in Christ” means here. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:23	bdmz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast between what the Judean believers did know about Paul (they were **hearing** that he was **now proclaiming the faith**) with what they did not know about Paul (how he looked, [1:22](../01/22.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+1:23	hw08			μόνον & ἀκούοντες ἦσαν	1	Alternate translation: “all that the believers in the region of Judea knew about me was that people were saying” or “all that the people belonging to the churches in the region of Judea knew about me was that people were saying”
+1:23	ss1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ	1	Here, the phrase **The one** refers to Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:23	bh1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πίστιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:23	lo0r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν πίστιν	1	Paul is figuratively describing the message about Jesus (the gospel) by association with **faith**, which is the response that the message about Jesus requires or solicits. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” or “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:23	y5ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπόρθει	1	Here, the word **destroying** refers to trying to stop the spread of the Christian message. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:24	qp4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν ἐμοὶ	1	Here, the phrase **in me** means “because of me” and is giving the reason why the Judean believers were praising God, namely because of Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1:24	cpni			ἐν ἐμοὶ	1	The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me”
+2:intro	xe28				0	# Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+2:1	mtgj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	ἔπειτα	1	The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. See how you translated the word **Then** in [1:18](../01/18.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
+2:1	zt61			ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	# Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md).
+2:1	zth5			ἀνέβην	1	Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+2:2	e8xu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
+2:2	ll4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἀνέβην	1	See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+2:2	szwl			κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν	1	The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate that Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “because God told me to” or “because God revealed to me that I should” or “because God showed me that I should” (2) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to a revelation” or “in accord with what God had revealed to me”
+2:2	zvkg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:2	g384		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:2	ypg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but privately I set it before the ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+2:2	msv4			τοῖς δοκοῦσιν	1	Alternate translation: “to the men who seemed to be influential” or “to those who were recognized as leaders of the believers in Jerusalem” or “to those who were leaders of the church in Jerusalem”
+2:2	t6we		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον	1	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “to ensure I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+2:2	ejb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον	1	Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2:2	svvy			εἰς κενὸν	1	Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing”
+2:3	wyrr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	Here, the word **But** is introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]
+2:3	ybww		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν	1	The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+2:3	xs8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι	1	The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2:4	kwoz			διὰ δὲ & ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν	1	The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be giving the reason why some people were demanding that Titus be circumcised. Alternate translation: “But this issue occurred because of” (2) be connected to [2:1-2](../02/01.md) and be giving the reason why Paul “went up again to Jerusalem” (2:1) and privately “set before” (communicated to) the church leaders in Jerusalem the gospel that he proclaimed among the Gentiles (2:2). Alternate translation: “But I talked to them privately because” or “But we went to Jerusalem because of” (3) be beginning a sentence which Paul never completes. Alternate translation (notice that only the punctuation differs from the ULT, the closing “—” indicates that Paul does not complete his thought before moving onto the next verse): “But it was because of … so that they will enslave us—”
+2:4	j5ka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι	1	Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. By using this metaphor Paul means that these people had bad motives for wanting to observe the believers. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2:4	jx0q			παρεισάκτους	1	In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the phrase **brought in** could mean: (1) that these **false brothers** were invited in by someone. Alternate translation: “secretly invited” or (2) that they came into the midst of the believers by their own initiative. Alternate translation: “deceptive coming of”
+2:4	fpkc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ψευδαδέλφους	1	Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:4	etlo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:4	lyqj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν	1	When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2:4	uvjw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union that believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” or “through our union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2:4	v9fp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which the **false brothers** spied on their freedom, to **enslave them**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+2:4	l7n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν	1	Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2:5	pow3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	εἴξαμεν	1	When Paul says **we**, he is not including the Galatian Christians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2:5	w6dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἷς οὐδὲ & εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ	1	Here, to **not … yield in submission** means “to not agree with and comply with the demands of” the people who said that Titus needed to be circumcised. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “we did not give in to their demands” or “we did not comply with what they wanted us to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:5	bba7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **submission**, you could express the same idea with a verbal phrase as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:5	smpn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὥραν	1	Here, the phrase **an hour** refers to a short period of time. If you have an equivalent expression in your culture you could use that or if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate Paul’s meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “a short period of time” or “a short amount of time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+2:5	a3hr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Paul and his ministry partners **did not … yield in submission** to those who taught that circumcision was necessary. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+2:5	k61r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “true” and/or “correct,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:5	bqqq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	Here, the possessive form is used to describe the **truth** that belongs to and is contained within **the gospel** message. It is also being used to contrast the genuine and correct gospel with “false gospels” such as the one Paul is refuting in this letter. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+2:6	xcdh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce something that is in contrast to what the “false brothers” in [2:4](../02/04.md) wanted to do. The “false brothers” wanted to “enslave” the believers by adding the requirement of circumcision to the gospel message. Beginning in this verse Paul explains (in [2:6-10](../6/06.md)) that, in contrast to the actions of the “false brothers,” the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not require that Paul add anything to the content of his gospel message. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]
+2:6	rfvs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν δοκούντων εἶναί τι	1	The phrase **the ones seeming to be something•• implies the word “important” and is very similar in meaning to the phrase ••the ones seeming important** at the end of this verse. If it would help your readers, you could express the implied word explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ones seeming to be something important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:6	flz3			ὁποῖοί ποτε ἦσαν, οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει, πρόσωπον ὁ Θεὸς ἀνθρώπου οὐ λαμβάνει	1	The phrase **what sort they were formerly matters nothing to me; God does not accept the face of man** is a parenthetical statement. Use a natural form in your language for introducing and/or expressing a parenthetical statement.
+2:6	zrw5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁποῖοί	1	The phrase **what sort** implies the word “people.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “what sort of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:6	st6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁποῖοί ποτε ἦσαν, οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει	1	The phrase **what sort they were formerly matters nothing to me** does not mean that Paul did not regard these people’s character as important but rather it means that he did not let their status influence his decision making. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:6	c9xx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρόσωπον ὁ Θεὸς ἀνθρώπου οὐ λαμβάνει	1	Here, the term **face** means “external status and position.” The phrase **God does not accept the face of man** is an idiom which means that God does not base his judgements and decisions on external factors. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “God does not judge with partiality” or “God does not look at external factors when making decisions” or “God does not show partiality” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+2:6	nm0b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a general sense to mean all people in general, including women. Alternate translation: “of a person” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
+2:6	ku3t			οἱ δοκοῦντες	1	See how you translated the similar phrase “those who seemed to be important” in [2:2](../02/02.md).
+2:6	afy6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐμοὶ & οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο	1	Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+2:7	visz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ τοὐναντίον	1	Paul uses the phrase **But on the contrary** to introduce a contrast to the idea that the leaders in Jerusalem might have added anything to the content of his message. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+2:7	l5m5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδόντες	1	Here, the phrase **having seen** means “having understood**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:7	vlpz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπίστευμαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God entrusted me with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2:7	m5e5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀκροβυστίας, καθὼς Πέτρος τῆς περιτομῆς	1	Paul is describing non-Jewish people by association with something they would not have had done to them, circumcision, and he is describing Jewish people by association with something they would have had done to them, circumcision. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+2:8	tmva			ὁ γὰρ ἐνεργήσας Πέτρῳ εἰς ἀποστολὴν τῆς περιτομῆς, ἐνήργησεν καὶ ἐμοὶ εἰς τὰ ἔθνη	1	This entire verse is a parenthetical statement. In this verse Paul gives the reason why the leaders of the church in Jerusalem determined that Paul was authorized and commissioned by God to bring the gospel to non-Jews. Use a natural form in your language for introducing and/or expressing a parenthetical statement.
+2:8	yh9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ	1	Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:8	e5wv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς περιτομῆς	1	See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+2:8	n1b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐνήργησεν καὶ ἐμοὶ εἰς τὰ ἔθνη	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “also worked in me for apostleship to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+2:9	qfp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	γνόντες τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι	1	The abstract noun *grace** refers to God graciously giving Paul the task of proclaiming the gospel to non-Jews. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “graciously” or “kindly” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having understood the task that God had graciously given to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:9	dt40		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν δοθεῖσάν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2:9	k66v			οἱ δοκοῦντες & εἶναι	1	See how you translated the phrase **the ones seeming to be** in [2:2](../02/02.md).
+2:9	he6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ δοκοῦντες στῦλοι εἶναι	1	Here, **pillars** refers to James, Cephas and John, who were leaders of the believers in Jerusalem. In that culture important leaders of a group were sometimes referred to as **pillars** because of the support that they provided the group. If your readers would not understand what **pillars** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2:9	e5rm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	δεξιὰς ἔδωκαν & κοινωνίας	1	Here, **gave the right hand** is an action that indicates agreement. Shaking hands indicated that they agreed with each other and were pledging to work together as ministry partners towards the same goal. Essentially, they would be in fellowship and shaking each others right hand indicated this. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+2:9	yxvz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κοινωνίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fellowship**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:9	bl9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which **James and Cephas and John … gave the right hand of fellowship to Barnabas** and Paul. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+2:9	uuss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς εἰς τὰ ἔθνη, αὐτοὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν περιτομήν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The words he is leaving out are probably “go” or “proclaim the good news.” If it would help your readers, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we would go to the Gentiles, and they would go the circumcision” or “we would proclaim the good news to the Gentiles, and they would proclaim the good news to the circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+2:9	j031		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2:9	n8en		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν περιτομήν	1	See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+2:10	fpj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵνα μνημονεύωμεν	1	Here, the word **only** introduces an exception clause that qualifies Paul’s statement at the end of [2:6](../02/06.md), where Paul said that the leaders in Jerusalem “added nothing” to his message (meaning they did not require him to do or teach anything else). Use an appropriate form in your language so that it does not appear that Paul is making a statement here that contradicts his statement at the end of [2:6](../02/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
+2:10	v265		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	μνημονεύωμεν	1	When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2:10	bbdk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν πτωχῶν & μνημονεύωμεν	1	Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:10	yfu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πτωχῶν	1	Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+2:11	rdi8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast. The actions that Paul will describe in [2:11-13](../02/11.md) are in contrast to the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+2:11	yuav		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+2:11	c9h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην	1	The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly, face to face. If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. (See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md)). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+2:11	cr74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατεγνωσμένος ἦν	1	Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:11	qvig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	ὅτε δὲ ἦλθεν Κηφᾶς εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην, ὅτι κατεγνωσμένος ἦν	1	This verse gives the result of Cephas’ hypocritical actions, and [2:12-13](../02/12.md) gives the reason for (and explanation leading to) the result. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by placing verse 12 and 13 before the contents of this verse as modeled by the UST. You would need to adapt or not translate the first phrase in [2:14](../02/14.md), “But when” so that [2:14](../02/14.md) begins with (or with something similar to) the phrase “I saw” as modeled by the UST. You would then present the combined verses as 11-13. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge)
+2:12	yeeb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s reason for why he “opposed” Cephas “to his face” (see [2:11](../02/11.md)) and for why Paul claimed in [2:11](../02/11.md) that Cephas “stood condemned.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. If it would be more natural in your language to state the reason for an action before giving the result see the note for [2:11](../02/11.md) on creating a verse bridge. Alternate translation: “The reason is that” or “The reason that Peter stood condemned is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+2:12	hqcc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθεῖν & ἦλθον	1	Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+2:12	b23d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+2:12	a6gv			ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν	1	Alternate translation: “stayed away from”
+2:12	z1kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly as modeled by the UST. See [6:12](../06/12.md) where Paul says that those trying to compel the Galatian believers were doing so because the did not want to be persecuted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:12	fy79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+2:13	urwh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ λοιποὶ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Here, the phrase **the rest of the Jews** refers only to the other Jewish believers who were in Antioch. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:13	nkrh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+2:13	iau6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει	1	Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:13	v4cj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2:13	vmkj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:14	k16c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+2:14	sg53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν	1	Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+2:14	va3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:14	s978		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν	1	This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) are a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of this verse are a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+2:14	z4fp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help Cephas understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+2:14	qlzt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+2:14	ish9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σὺ & ἀναγκάζεις	1	Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+2:15	vjsh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	When Paul says **We** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2:15	tzxo			ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί	1	Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles”
+2:15	tz45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί	1	The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and need God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:16	vduo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+2:16	y3tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+2:16	xhx3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιοῦται & δικαιωθῶμεν & δικαιωθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2:16	s2ys		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἔργων νόμου	-1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe what types of **works** he is referring to. He is specifically referring to works of the Mosaic law. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses … doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses … doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses” or “doing the things Moses commanded … doing the things Moses commanded … doing the things Moses commanded” or “doing the things commanded in the law of Moses … doing the things commanded in the law of Moses … doing the things commanded in the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+2:16	purc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔργων νόμου	-1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys” or “obey”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:16	ncnt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	ἐὰν μὴ	1	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “but rather only” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
+2:16	iivr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	-1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:16	q4iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & δικαιωθῶμεν	1	When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2:16	nzcb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+2:16	gp4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ	1	Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason why Cephas and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**. They **believed in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+2:16	j7g5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σάρξ	1	The word **flesh** refers to human beings. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+2:16	ctbj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	οὐ & ἄνθρωπος & πᾶσα σάρξ	1	Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people and refer to people of all ages and nationalities. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases when translating the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people of all ages and nationalities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+2:17	gf9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+2:17	gtu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+2:17	vnp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ	1	The phrase **justified in Christ** means made righteous in God’s sight because of being united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:17	m0tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for God to justify us through our faith in Christ” or “for God to justify us because of our faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2:17	s2r8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	εὑρέθημεν	1	When Paul says **we** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+2:17	mg0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ	1	Paul uses the word **ourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+2:17	ph83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2:17	c1op		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτωλοί & ἁμαρτίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being a sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:17	qw76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος	1	The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+2:17	yy9s			μὴ γένοιτο	1	The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!”
+2:18	mwuo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ, παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω	1	Paul speaks of no longer thinking it is necessary to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying the law of Moses. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to going back again to acting like, and teaching, that it is necessary to keep the laws of Moses. Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the laws of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2:18	o7g8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παραβάτην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:19	wdaa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** is introducing the reason that Paul said **May it never be” in [2:17](../02/17.md) and and also introducing information which gives support for what he said in [2:18](../02/18.md). Use a natural form for introducing a reason for something that was said prior. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+2:19	zqqw			διὰ νόμου	1	Alternate translation: “by means of the law”
+2:19	r55d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & νόμῳ ἀπέθανον	1	Here, the phrase, **I … died to the law** could: (1) be a metaphor that refers to believers’ vicarious death with Christ through their believing in him and their consequent union with him which they as a result of their faith in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. (See [Rom 7:4](../07/04.md) and [Gal 4:4-5](../04/04.md)) Alternate translation: “I … died to the law through my union with Christ” (2) be a metaphor that refers to Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law. Alternate translation: “I … died to the law through the things that it required” or “I … died to the law through the things that it commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2:19	yl7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose or reason for which he **died to the law**. The purpose was **so that** he **might live to God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+2:19	l3r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Θεῷ ζήσω	1	The phrase **live to God** means “live for God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I might live for God” or “I might live to serve God” or “I might live to please God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:19	xg5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι	1	The phrase **I have been crucified with Christ** is a metaphor. Paul is not saying that he literally died with Christ. Paul is using this metaphor to express the reality that as a result of his faith in Christ, and the subsequent union with Christ that his faith has brought about, God now views Paul as if he had died with Christ. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **crucified with Christ** in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2:19	fh2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “the law” was the reason Christ had to be but to death. Roman soldiers put Jesus to death, but in context Paul is explaining that it was because of the requirements of “the law” that put Christ to died. If you must state the action you could explain this in your translation as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2:20	o3jk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζῶ & οὐκέτι ἐγώ, ζῇ δὲ ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός	1	Here, the phrase **I no longer live, but Christ lives in me** is a metaphor. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or you could express the meaning plainly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2:20	y2qf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὃ & νῦν ζῶ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+2:20	rtmc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὃ & νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί	1	Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+2:20	a4j0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he now lives his life by means of having faith in God’s Son. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “I live by having faith in God’s Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:20	bb2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	**the Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+2:20	m55w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντός με	1	The phrase **the one** refers to **the Son of God**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who is the one having loved me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:20	by5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν	1	The phrase **having given himself** means that Jesus gave himself as a sacrifice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:21	tj6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐκ ἀθετῶ	1	Here, Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **do not**, together with a phrase, **set aside** that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I strongly affirm” or “I do uphold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+2:21	xvoq			οὐκ ἀθετῶ	1	Alternate translation: “I do not ignore” or “I do not dismiss”
+2:21	g5b8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:21	ogus		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “righteous”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+2:21	yl3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses. Also, Paul knows that Christ died for a definite purpose. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. If your language does state things as a hypothetical possibility that the speaker is trying to prove false then use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+2:21	imxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Use a natural way in your language for expressing conditional “if … then” constructions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+2:21	m74u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ & διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη	1	Here, the word **through** expresses the means by which something happens. The phrase **if righteousness is through the law** means “if righteousness could be obtained through keeping the law.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if righteousness could be obtained by keeping the law” or “if a person could be justified by keeping the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2:21	dv5f			διὰ νόμου	1	The phrase **through the law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of the law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md).
+2:21	rku5			ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν	1	Alternate translation: “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” or “then it was pointless for Christ to die”
+3:intro	xd92				0	# Galatians 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Equality in Christ\n\nAll Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nPaul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\nThis is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter in contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])\n\n### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”\nBible scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit all of the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:1	u6lo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὦ	1	**O** is an exclamation word. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language that would be natural to use in this context. Alternate translation: “Oh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+3:1	xvji			ἀνόητοι Γαλάται	1	Alternate translation: “you Galatians are without understanding” or “you Galatians who are without understanding”
+3:1	p7uw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν	1	# General Information:\n\nPaul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+3:1	ryu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν	1	Paul is using irony to express the fact that the Galatian believers are acting as though someone has put a spell on them. He does not really believe that someone has put a spell on them. In fact Paul is upset with the Galatians believers for willingly choosing to believe false teachers and letting themselves be deceived. If your readers would misunderstand what Paul is saying here, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You behave as if someone has put a spell on you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+3:1	gwv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἷς κατ’ ὀφθαλμοὺς Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος	1	This phrase is a metaphor which could: (1) be referring to someone publicly drawing a picture for people to see. In this case Paul would be referring to the teaching about Jesus that the Galatians had received as if it were a clear picture that they had seen with their eyes. If your readers would not understand what **publicly portrayed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you yourselves heard the clear teaching about Jesus being crucified” (2) be referring to the practice of someone posting a public announcement for people to read. In this case Paul would be referring to his preaching the good news about Jesus as if it were a public announcement which the Galatians had read. If your readers would not understand what **publicly portrayed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you yourselves heard the clear teaching about Jesus being crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:1	ty3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:2	wq9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐλάβετε, ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “You received the Spirit, not by doing what the law says, but by believing what you heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+3:2	wll8			Πνεῦμα	1	The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you use a word that would be appropriate to use for the Holy Spirit.
+3:2	dbp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	See how you translated the phrase **by works of the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs three times. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+3:2	cfj2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	Paul is using the possessive form here to describe the response that the Galatians had when they heard the preaching of the gospel which was to respond to it with **faith**. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “by believing what you heard” or “by hearing with faith” or “by trusting in the Messiah when you heard the message about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+3:3	f96u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὕτως ἀνόητοί ἐστε	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to emphatically show his surprise. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “You are very foolish!” or “Don’t be so foolish!” or “Surely you cannot be so foolish!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+3:3	kkg7			οὕτως	1	Here, the word **so** adds magnitude to (amplifies) the word **foolish** and also points forward to what comes after the word **foolish**. Use a natural form in your language for indicating this.
+3:3	nghz			ἀνόητοί	1	See how you translated the word ** foolish** in [3:1](../03/01.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
+3:3	vof3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐναρξάμενοι Πνεύματι, νῦν σαρκὶ ἐπιτελεῖσθε	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to try to make the Galatian believers think about what they are doing. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+3:3	croz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐναρξάμενοι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Having begun the Christian life” or “Having begun your new relationship with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+3:3	xff5			Πνεύματι	1	The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit.
+3:3	xu4d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σαρκὶ	1	Paul is describing the actions a person does while in their body by association with their body, which he calls **flesh**. Here, **flesh** refers to a reliance on one’s own effort in doing outward deeds and doing these actions with a self-sufficient and self-reliant trust in them instead of trusting God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “by your own effort” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+3:4	iyj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to try to make the Galatian believers think about the implications of believing and following the false teachers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+3:4	xujz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ	1	The original word that Paul used which is translated as **experienced** by the ULT could refer to: (1) the spiritual privileges and blessings that the Galatian believers had experienced such as receiving God’s Spirit when they believed in Jesus and God “working miracles” among them, both of which are mentioned in the next verse. If your language does not allow you to use a neutral term but rather requires a more specific term you could specify that the things the Galatians experienced were good things as modeled by the UST. (2) experiencing bad things such as suffering. If this is what Paul means here, then he is referring to the suffering that the Galatians believers experienced when they were persecuted. Alternate translation: “Keep in mind that if what God has done for you was because of your obeying the laws that God gave to Moses and not because of trusting in Christ, did you not suffer many things needlessly? I certainly hope that you did not suffer like that needlessly” (3) both good things and bad things here and be referring to both the persecution that the Galatians had experienced and the spiritual blessings that they had experienced. Because it is not known for sure what type of things that Paul is referring to, if possible you should try to use a neutral term or expression. You could then translate this rhetorical question as the ULT does or with a similar neutral phrase such as “Did all the things that happened to you not cause you to think about them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+3:4	mvad			ἐπάθετε	1	Alternate translation: “Did you experience”
+3:4	nq68			εἰκῇ & καὶ εἰκῇ	1	Alternate translation: “uselessly … it was really uselessly” or “in vain … it was really in vain” or “for no purpose … it was really for no purpose”
+3:4	xl9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ	1	The phrase **if indeed it was really for nothing** shows contingency regarding his rhetorical question **Have you experienced so many things for nothing** and shows that Paul still has hope for the Galatians. Paul hopes that the Galatians will not make the **many things** that they have **experienced** be **for nothing** by following the false teachers who were teaching that it was necessary that they follow the laws of Moses such as circumcision and the dietary laws it required. Paul is making a hypothetical statement to help his readers recognize the serious implications of following the teachings of the false teachers instead of trusting in Jesus alone. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was really for nothing that you experienced so many things, but I hope with you that this is not the case” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+3:4	mx8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ	1	The phrase **if indeed it was really for nothing** is a rhetorical question. Paul is using the question form here to help the Galatians think about what he is saying and to show that he still has hope that they will not follow the teachings of the false teachers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+3:5	fuzy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ οὖν ἐπιχορηγῶν ὑμῖν τὸ Πνεῦμα καὶ ἐνεργῶν δυνάμεις ἐν ὑμῖν, ἐξ ἔργων νόμου ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	This entire verse is a rhetorical question. Paul is using the question form here to teach the Galatians a truth by engaging their reasoning. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “God who gives you his Spirit and does miracles among you does not do these things because you obey the law of Moses. Surely you must know that God gives you these blessings because you believed the good news about the Messiah when you heart it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+3:5	upx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ	1	Here, the phrase **the one** refers to “God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who is the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:5	xoax			Πνεῦμα	1	The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit.
+3:5	qnkz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	See how you translated the phrase **by hearing of faith** in [3:02](../03/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+3:5	s3bc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	Paul asks another rhetorical question to remind the Galatians how people receive the Spirit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+3:5	j4vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	See how you translated the phrase **by works of the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs three times. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+3:5	e17q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως	1	Your language may require that what the people heard and whom they trusted be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “because you heard the message and had faith in Jesus” or “because you listened to the message and trusted in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:6	ahy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καθὼς	1	# Connecting Statement:\n\nHere, the phrase **Just as** indicates that what follows is connected to what precedes it, specifically [3:1-5](../03/01.md). The phrase **Just as** is also introducing new information. The new information that this phrase is introducing is the biblical example of Abraham. Use a form that would be appropriate in this context. Alternate translation: “Even as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+3:6	iv9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐπίστευσεν τῷ Θεῷ καὶ ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, Paul quotes Genesis 15:16. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with opening and closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning and end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+3:6	ohbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God credited it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:6	ghuy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλογίσθη	1	Here, the word **it** refers to Abraham’s belief in God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God credited his belief” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:6	f7sv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated the word **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:7	i9x4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ἐκ πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those who believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:7	rh9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ἐκ πίστεως	1	Your language may require you to state the object of **faith**. Here, the phrase **by faith** is probably a shortened way of of saying “who by faith in Christ are trusting God to consider them righteous” or “who are trusting God to consider them righteous because they believe in Christ”. Here, the phrase **by faith** is equivalent or similar in meaning to the phrase “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs in the phrase “we also believed in Christ Jesus, so that we might be justified by faith in Christ”. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the ones who by faith in Christ are trusting God to consider them righteous” or “the ones who are trusting God to consider them righteous because they believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:7	kq1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱοί & Ἀβραὰμ	1	People who have faith in God, as Abraham did, are here spoken of as if they were Abraham’s **sons**. Paul does not mean that people who have faith in God are Abraham’s biological descendants but rather he is saying that they share a spiritual similarity to him because they believe in God, therefore Paul calls them **sons of Abraham**. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sons of Abraham** in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:7	pq0z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	υἱοί	1	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+3:8	vs1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	προϊδοῦσα & ἡ Γραφὴ, ὅτι ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοῖ τὰ ἔθνη ὁ Θεὸς, προευηγγελίσατο τῷ Ἀβραὰμ	1	Here, **the Scripture** is spoken of as though it were a person who could foresee **that God would justify the Gentiles by faith** and **preach the gospel**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+3:8	wws9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἡ Γραφὴ	1	Here, the phrase **the Scripture** could refer to: (1) The Scriptures as a whole, referring here to the entire Old Testament. If you are are using capitalization, or some other convention, to indicate when the words “Scripture” and “Scriptures” refer to the entirety of the collected writings of the Bible use that convention here. Here, “Scripture” would only refer to the Old Testament since the New Testament was still in the process of being written at this time. Most likely Paul is referring to the entire Old Testament when he says “the Scripture” here, and then when he quotes Genesis 12:3 at the end of this verse he is giving a specific example of a passage within the Old Testament that teaches **that God would justify the Gentiles by faith**. (2) just the specific scripture reference which is cited at the end of this verse, Genesis 12:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+3:8	htbq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the object of **faith** explicitly. Alternate translation: “by their faith in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:8	ojbm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”. Alternate translation: “by their believing in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:8	f6ly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	προευηγγελίσατο τῷ Ἀβραὰμ	1	The sentence **In you all the nations will be blessed** is a quotation from Genesis 12:3. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “preached the gospel beforehand to Abraham where it is written” or “preached the gospel beforehand to Abraham when Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+3:8	j83j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1	Here, the term **nations** refers to the people who make up these **nations**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people from all the nations” or “people from every nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+3:8	qf98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνευλογηθήσονται ἐν σοὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “In you God will bless all the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:9	ss1b			ὥστε	1	Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Consequently”
+3:9	l1bq			οἱ ἐκ πίστεως	1	See how you translated the phrase **the ones by faith** in [3:7](../03/7.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
+3:9	m5ef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ ἐκ πίστεως εὐλογοῦνται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones by faith are the ones that God will bless” or “the ones who believe are blessed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:10	r5bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσοι & ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἰσὶν	1	Here, the phrase **as many as are of works of the law** is probably a shortened way of saying “as many as are relying on works of the law as the basis for God considering them to be righteous”. Here, the phrase **of works of the law** is similar in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs in the phrase “no man is justified by works of the law”. Here, the phrase **as many as are of works of the law** is describing people who rely on the **works of the law** and is in contrast to the phrase “the ones by faith” in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning explicitly here. Alternate translation: “as many as rely on the works of the law as the basis for being righteous before God” or “as many as are relying on works of the law as the basis for God considering them to be righteous” or “as many as are trusting that God will consider them righteous because they try to obey the Law of Moses” or “as many as are seeking for God to consider them righteous on the basis of following what the Mosaic Law commands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:10	uz3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	
+3:10	fv3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται & γεγραμμένοις	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:10	mxe7			ὅσοι γὰρ ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	Alternate translation: “All people who follow the law” or “Everyone who tries to be justified through obeying the law”
+3:10	jhr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ κατάραν εἰσίν	1	Here, **under a curse** represents being cursed by God and refers to being condemned by God and therefore being doomed to eternal punishment. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “are cursed by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:10	bin9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὸ κατάραν εἰσίν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **curse**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “curse”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will curse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:10	uj98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γέγραπται	1	Here, Paul uses the phrase **it is written** to indicate that what follows is a quotation from the Old Testament Scriptures. Paul assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:11	zyvq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν νόμῳ, οὐδεὶς δικαιοῦται παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God justifies no one by the law” or “God justifies no one as a result of their seeking to obey the Law of Moses” or “God justifies no person on the basis of doing what the Law of Moses commands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:11	sn9h			δῆλον	1	Alternate translation: “is evident”
+3:11	e2hj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ὅτι	2	The sentence **The righteous will live by faith** is a quotation from Habakkuk 2:4. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations from an important or sacred text. Alternate translation: “because it is written in Scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+3:11	qiab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	The sentence **The righteous will live by faith** is a quotation from Habakkuk 2:4. Use a natural way of indicating that something is a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+3:11	i537		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	Paul is citing the prophet Habakkuk who is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “People who are righteous will live by their faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+3:11	h7t4			ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	The phrase **by faith** could be connected to: (1) the phrase **will live** and be describing the ongoing means by which a righteous person has spiritual life, namely by their faith. Alternate translation: “The righteous person has life through their faith” or “The righteous person lives as a result of their faith” “The righteous person has spiritual life as a result of their faith” (2) the phrase **the righteous** and be describing the means by which God considers a sinful person to be **righteous*, namely by their having faith in him. Alternate translation: “The person who is made right with God as a result of their faith will live” or “Every person whose record of sins God erases because that person trusts God will live spiritually”
+3:11	osgj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by believing” or “because they believe” or “by believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:11	e610		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that the object of **faith** here is God. Alternate translation: “by believing in God” or “because they believe in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:12	jr9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	The word **Now** indicates that Paul is introducing new information into his argument and it also indicates that Paul is introducing information that will be in contrast with his statement in [3:11](../03/11.md), that “the law” is not able to justify a person. Use a natural form in your language for indicating these things. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+3:12	hr2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:12	r7i7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως	1	Here, the phrase **the law is not by faith** means that the Law of Moses is not based on faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the Law of Moses is not founded on faith” or “the Law of Moses is not dependent upon faith” or “when God gave his laws to the Jews he did not make them dependent upon a person believing in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:12	fml8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	What follows the word **but** here is indicating a contrast between **law** and **faith**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+3:12	opyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἀλλ’	1	The phrase **The one doing these things will live in them** is a quotation from Leviticus 18:5. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations from an important or sacred text. Alternate translation: “but as it is written in Scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+3:12	khuu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὰ	1	The phrase **these things” refers to God’s “statutes” and “laws” which are mentioned in the first part of Leviticus 18:5. Paul is citing the second half of Leviticus 18:5 here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly in your translation what “these things” refers to. Alternate translation: “these law and statutes of mine” or “my law and statutes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:12	rep5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζήσεται ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	Here, the phrase **will live in them** means FILL or DELETE. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will live because of them” or “will because he obeyed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:13	iql5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξηγόρασεν	1	Paul uses the metaphor of a person buying back lost property or buying the freedom of a slave as a picture of God sending Jesus to pay for people’s sins by dying on the cross. If your readers would not understand what **redeem** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:13	ml63		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς κατάρας & κατάρα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **curse**, you could express the same idea with a verb phrase as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:13	vqc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κατάρα	1	By using the phrase **a curse** Paul is describing a person who is cursed by God by association with the **curse** itself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “one who was cursed” or “one who was cursed by God” or “one who God cursed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+3:13	vaay			ὑπὲρ	1	Alternate translation: “for”
+3:13	p5m9			ὅτι γέγραπται	1	The phrase **for it is written** is introducing a quotation from Deuteronomy 21:23. See how you translated the phrase **for it is written** in [3:10](../03/10.md) where it is also introducing a quotation from Scripture.
+3:13	vjbr			ἐπικατάρατος πᾶς ὁ	1	See how you translated the phrase **Cursed is everyone** in [3:10](../03/10.md).
+3:13	mt6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ξύλου	1	In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the word **tree** can refer to a post made out of wood. Here, Paul is using this term to refer to the wooden cross that Jesus was crucified on. If it would help your readers, use a term which would be applicable to something made of wood and not merely to a live tree. Alternate translation: “a pole” or “a wooden pole” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:14	brf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for Christ’s death (which he discussed in the previous verse). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+3:14	z38j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εὐλογία	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blessing**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “bless”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:14	a0nd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, the word **in** could be used to indicate: (1) by what means **the blessing of Abraham** would **come to the Gentiles**, namely “by means of” **Christ Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of Christ Jesus” or “through Christ Jesus” or “by Christ Jesus” (2) the sphere in which **the blessing of Abraham** would **come to the Gentiles**, namely **so that the blessing of Abraham might come to the Gentiles** who are “in the sphere of” **Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “who are in union with Christ Jesus” (3) the reason **the blessing of Abraham** would ** come to the Gentiles**, namely “because of” **Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “because of what Christ Jesus has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:14	gt7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	2	Here, the phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for **the blessing of Abraham** coming **to the Gentiles**, namely so that **the promise of the Spirit** could be received **through faith**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+3:14	g87i			διὰ	1	Alternate translation: “by”
+3:14	agv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	Here, the object of **faith** is Christ. If it would help your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. The phrase **through faith** also occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md), where it has “Jesus Christ” as the object of the phrase “through faith”. Alternate translation: “through faith in Christ” or “through faith in the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:14	qsai		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:14	h46q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λάβωμεν	1	When Paul says **we** he is speaking of himself and the Galatian believers so **we** would be inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+3:14	ezpz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promise**, you could express the same idea with a verb form such as “promised”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:14	vce3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to explain what the **promise** is regarding. Paul is using the possessive form to indicate that the **promise** he is referring to here is the promise regarding the coming Holy Spirit. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “promise regarding the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+3:14	l6oj			Πνεῦμα	1	The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit.
+3:15	al9b			ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the term “brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “Brothers and sisters”
+3:15	c3gs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1	Here, Paul uses the phrase **according to man** to means that he is speaking in accord with the manner of human practice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to human practice” or “with a human analogy from human legal practice” or “using an analogy from standard daily life”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:15	bfjq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to humans in general. If your readers would misunderstand this you can indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to human practice” or “using an analogy from standard human practice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+3:15	si56			ὅμως	1	Here, the word **Nevertheless** could be: (1) indicating a concession. Paul is admitting or conceding that the analogy from human legal affairs that he is about to use is imperfect, **Nevertheless** he is going to use it to illustrate a spiritual truth. (2) indicating a comparison. Alternate translation: “similarly” or “likewise”
+3:15	jrdg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνθρώπου κεκυρωμένην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which people have established” or “which men have established” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:15	rbir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἀνθρώπου κεκυρωμένην διαθήκην, οὐδεὶς ἀθετεῖ ἢ ἐπιδιατάσσεται	1	Paul is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “no one sets aside or adds to a covenant which people have established” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+3:15	zu16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to people in general. If your readers would misunderstand this you can indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+3:16	f1xu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, the word **Now** could indicate: (1) that Paul is introducing additional information into his ongoing argument. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” (2) a transition. Alternate translation: “But note that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+3:16	hdfm			ἐπαγγελίαι	1	See how you translated the word “promise” in [3:14](../03/14.md).
+3:16	rreg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ & τοῖς σπέρμασιν & τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	Here, the term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If your readers would not understand what **seed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:16	x8m7			τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ & τοῖς σπέρμασιν & τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	In order to correctly communicate Paul’s meaning here it is important to translate both occurrences of the word **seed** with a singular form and to translate the single occurrence of the word **seeds** with a plural form that indicates more than one.
+3:16	j9x7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ λέγει	1	Here, the word **He** could: (1) refer to God speaking to Abraham. By using the phrase **and to your seed** Paul is referring to multiple passages in the book of Genesis where God made promises to Abraham and his **seed**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that **He** refers to the God. Alternate translation: “God does not say” (2) be translated as “It” and be referring to the various passages in Genesis which record that God spoke promises to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that **It** refers to Scripture. Alternate translation: “Scripture does not say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:16	w3wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἐπὶ πολλῶν, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἐφ’ ἑνός	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as speaking about many, but as speaking about one” or “as referring to many, but as referring to one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+3:16	t25e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σου	1	The word **your** is singular and refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+3:17	pdd3			δὲ	1	Alternate translation: “And”
+3:17	h36m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	τετρακόσια καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη	1	Alternate translation: “four hundred and thirty years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+3:17	v3gq			διαθήκην	1	See how you translated the word “covenant” in [3:15](../03/15.md).
+3:17	qn7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προκεκυρωμένην ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which God established previously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:17	fmw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ καταργῆσαι	1	Here, the word **to** introduces what the result would have been if **the law** had **set aside the covenant previously established by God**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “so as to nullify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+3:17	ydsw			ἐπαγγελίαν	1	See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
+3:18	ujg2			εἰ & ἐκ & ἡ κληρονομία, οὐκέτι ἐξ	1	Alternate translation: “if the inheritance is from … then it is no longer from”
+3:18	c8fu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ κληρονομία	1	Paul speaks of God’s blessings to those who believe in him as if they were an **inheritance**. If your readers would not understand what **inheritance** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the blessing” or “God’s blessing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:18	h1xv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ νόμου & οὐκέτι ἐξ	1	Alternate translation: “is by the law, it is no longer by” or “is based on the law, it is no longer based on” or “comes from the law, it no longer comes from”
+3:18	pe31			ἐπαγγελίας & ἐπαγγελίας	1	See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
+3:18	q6jq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to the idea that **the inheritance is from the law**. Instead, Paul points out that **the inheritance** is based on God’s promise. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+3:18	xsep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κεχάρισται	1	Here, the word **it** refers to **the inheritance** mentioned earlier in this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “has graciously given the inheritance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:18	ue27			δι’	1	Here, the word **through** is indicating means and is introducing the means through which God gave **the inheritance … to Abraham**, namely **through a promise**. Use a natural form in your language for indicating the means by which something happens.
+3:19	kx2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ὁ νόμος	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to anticipate a question that the Galatian believers might have regarding the purpose of the law and to introduce his answer to this anticipated question. If it would help your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you what the purpose of the law is” or “Let me tell you why God added the law to the covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+3:19	mnw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὁ νόμος	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “was the law given” or “did God give the law” or “was the law added” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+3:19	uk9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσετέθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God added it” or “God added the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:19	yf5t			τῶν παραβάσεων χάριν προσετέθη	1	The phrase **because of transgressions** could refer to: (1) the purpose that **the law … was added** to the covenant with Abraham, namely the law **was added** to the covenant “for the purpose of showing what transgression is” or “for the purpose of showing people what sin is”. The phrase **because of transgressions** would then be stating the purpose that **the law … was added**, namely because people were sinning and God wanted show them what sin was by giving **the law**. Alternate translation: “It was added for the purpose of showing what transgression is” or “It was added for the purpose of showing people what sin is” (2) what caused God to decide that **the law** should be **added** to the covenant with Abraham. This phrase would then mean that what caused God to add **the law** to the covenant was because people were committing transgressions. The phrase **because of transgressions** would then be stating the cause for **the law** being **added**, namely because people were sinning and God wanted to correct people’s wrong and sinful behavior by showing them what righteous behavior was and so he gave **the law**. Alternate translation: “It was added because people were committing transgressions” or “It was added because people were sinning”
+3:19	phd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν παραβάσεων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **transgressions**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “sinful”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:19	cf66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “and God used angels to put it into effect” or “God gave the law through angels” or “God put the law into effect through angels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:19	lxcw			διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων	1	Translate the phrase **through angels** in a way that indicates that God was the source of the law and not angels. God was the source of the law but he used angels to give the law Moses. The Bible records in Deuteronomy 33:2; Hebrews 2:2; and Acts 7:38, 53 that God used angels to give Moses his law and this is what Jewish people believed regarding how God delivered his law to Moses. Alternate translation: “and God used angels to put it into effect” or “God gave the law through angels” or “God put the law into effect through angels”
+3:19	v74y			ἄχρις οὗ ἔλθῃ τὸ σπέρμα ᾧ ἐπήγγελται, διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων ἐν χειρὶ μεσίτου	1	When Paul says that **the law** was administered **by the hand of a mediator (Moses) until the seed would come to whom the promise had been made** his point is that **the law** was temporary and only needed **until the seed (Christ) would come**. By saying this, Paul is implicitly telling the Galatian believers that the law was temporary, and only needed until Christ, whom he calls **the seed**, came.
+3:19	bgi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν χειρὶ μεσίτου	1	The phrase **by the hand of** is an idiom which means “through.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “through a mediator” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+3:19	edcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μεσίτου	1	Here, the **mediator** that Paul is referring to is Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of Moses who acted as a mediator” or “of Moses who acted as a go-between” or “of Moses who acted as an intermediary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:19	m67a			σπέρμα	1	See how you translated the word **seed** in [3:16](../03/16.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
+3:19	hrzb			ἐπήγγελται	1	See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
+3:19	nl4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπήγγελται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God had made the promise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:20	x9l1			ὁ δὲ μεσίτης ἑνὸς οὐκ ἔστιν	1	In this verse Paul is proving to the Galatian believers that God’s promise to Abraham is superior to the law that he gave Moses. What Paul means by saying **a mediator is not for one** is that a mediator is not needed when one person is speaking with another person directly. Paul is implicitly expressing to the Galatian believers that the promise to Abraham is superior to the law because it was not given through a mediator but rather God gave the promise directly to Abraham. If it would help your readers you could indicate that in a footnote if you are using footnotes in your translation. See the Chapter 3 General Notes section “Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter” for more information regarding this section.
+3:20	pqtm			μεσίτης	1	See how you translated the term **mediator** in [3:19](../03/19.md).
+3:20	y3ix		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑνὸς	1	The phrase **for one** leaves the object implied. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what **one** is referring to. Alternate translation: “for one party alone” or “needed for one party” or “needed when there is only one party involved” or “is not needed as a go-between when only one party is involved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:20	lhui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	2	What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to the opening statement in this verse that **a mediator is not for one**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+3:20	l2b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δὲ	2	Here, the phrase **God is one** is a quote from Deuteronomy 6:4 which the Galatians believers would have been familiar with. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that the phrase **God is one** is cited from Scripture. Alternate translation: “but as God has said in Scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:20	cle8			Θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν	1	There are many different views among Bible scholars as to exactly what Paul means by using the phrase **God is one** here and how it is related to the phrase **a mediator is not for one** earlier in the verse. The most likely interpretation is that expressed by the UST. See the Chapter 3 General Notes section “Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter” for more information regarding this section.
+3:21	zwk0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ & νόμος κατὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to anticipate a question that the Galatian believers might have and to introduce his answer to the question which begins with the phrase **if a was given being able to make alive...** If it would help your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “you might think that the law is against the promises” or “you might think that the law is opposed to the promises” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+3:21	e43u			κατὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν	1	Alternate translation: “opposed to the promises” or “in conflict with the promises”
+3:21	ee7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν	1	The phrase **the promises** refers to the promises that God made to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promises that God made to Abraham” or “God’s promises to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:21	q7su			ἐπαγγελιῶν	1	See how you translated the word “promise” in [3:14](../03/14.md).
+3:21	nd97			μὴ γένοιτο	1	**May it never be** is an emphatic way of negating a statement. The statement that the phrase **May it never be** is negating is the proposed question **is the law against the promises**. Use a natural word or expression for strongly negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Certainly not!”
+3:21	jnwe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἐδόθη νόμος ὁ δυνάμενος ζῳοποιῆσαι, ὄντως	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Alternate translation: “if it was possible that a law was given that was able to make people alive, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+3:21	bjpb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη νόμος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God gave a law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:21	dljp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῳοποιῆσαι	1	Here, it is implied that Paul is referring to making “people” alive. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to make people alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:21	skc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ζῳοποιῆσαι	1	The phrase **to make alive** could refer to: (1) both eternal life in the future and to making people spiritually alive in the present. Paul is probably referring to both here since in this letter Paul discusses the important role of the Holy Spirit and the fact that the Holy Spirit is given through faith and not the law. (2) eternal life in the future after a person dies. If it is possible in your language, it would be best to retain a general phrase as modeled by the ULT, since Paul does not explain the phrase **to make alive**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+3:21	nebi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ δικαιοσύνη	1	See how you translated the word **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:21	iyg9			ἐν νόμου ἂν ἦν ἡ δικαιοσύνη	1	Alternate translation: “we could have become righteous by obeying that law”
+3:22	smkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word **But** is indicating a strong contrast between the hypothetical (and false) possibility that “the law” could make a person righteous. Paul is using the word **But** here to indicate this strong contrast and to introduce his explanation of what the law actually does. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+3:22	yzcp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνέκλεισεν ἡ Γραφὴ τὰ πάντα ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν	1	Paul speaks of **the Scripture** as though it were an authority figure who **imprisoned** people in a prison and he speaks of **sin** as though it were a jailer who keeps people imprisoned so that they cannot break free. If your readers would not understand what **imprisoned all things under sin** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:22	upkg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	συνέκλεισεν ἡ Γραφὴ τὰ πάντα ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν	1	Here, Paul speaks of **the Scripture** as though it were a person who is an authority figure who **imprisoned** people in a prison and he speaks of **sin** as though it were a jailer who keeps people imprisoned so that they cannot break free. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+3:22	jbn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ Γραφὴ	1	Here, the word **Scripture** could: (1) refer to all of the Old Testament scriptures. Use whatever convention you are using to indicate this. The ULT indicates when the word **Scripture** refers to the entire Bible, or the entire Old Testament, by capitalizing the word **Scripture**. (2) refer to a particular passage of Scripture such as Deuteronomy 27:26 or some other Old Testament passage. Alternate translation: “the scripture”
+3:22	dxqc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ Γραφὴ	1	Paul is describing “God” doing something by association with his Word, **the Scripture**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+3:22	mk9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ πάντα	1	Here, the phrase **all things* could refer to: (1) all people. If your language requires you to indicate explicitly what **all things** refers to, you could indicate that it refers to “people,” but if it doesn’t you could use a general expression as modeled by the ULT. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) the entire creation and the things which make up this present fallen world. See Romans 8:18-22. If you decide that this is what Paul means you should use a general phrase such as **all things** as the ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+3:22	dt14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν	1	Here, the phrase **under sin** refers to being “under the power of sin.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the power of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:22	xqmi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Following the phrase **so that** Paul states the purpose for which **the Scripture imprisoned all things under sin**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+3:22	pvv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοθῇ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might give the promise by faith in Jesus Christ to the ones believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:22	o9ap			ἐπαγγελία	1	See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
+3:22	elb4			ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοθῇ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1	Alternate translation: “God’s promise to Abraham which is received through faith in Jesus Christ might be given to the those who believe”
+3:22	ib27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1	The phrase **the promise** refers to the promise given to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise given to Abraham” or “the promise that God gave to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:22	jyvn			ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	See how you translated the phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). The phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md) has basically the exact same meaning as the phrase **by faith in Jesus Christ** does in this verse.
+3:22	bo1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:23	jzut		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πίστιν & τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trusting” or “believe”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:23	ztcj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸ τοῦ & ἐλθεῖν τὴν πίστιν	1	The phrase **before the faith came** means “before faith in Jesus Christ came.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “before faith in Jesus Christ came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:23	su16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα, συνκλειόμενοι	1	Here, Paul is continuing the metaphor of **the law** that he began in the previous verse. The power that **the law** had over humans us is spoken of as if the law were a prison guard holding people captive. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **held captive** by the law in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:23	aue6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ	1	Here, the word **under** means “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:23	r5y3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα, συνκλειόμενοι	1	Here, Paul is continuing his personification of **the law** that he began in the previous verse. Paul speaks of **the law** as though it were a jailer who **held** people **captive** and kept them **imprisoned** up **until** the time when the coming **faith** in Jesus Christ would **be revealed**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+3:23	e729		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law held us captive under its power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:23	xmur		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνκλειόμενοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the first half of the verse states that **the law** did it. Alternate translation: “and the law imprisoned us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:23	way9			εἰς τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	Here, the word **until** could: (1) refer to time and introduce the time period at which people being **imprisoned** under the law would terminate, namely **until** the time when God would reveal Jesus Christ as an object of faith. Alternate translation: “until God would reveal the message about trusting in Christ that he was about to reveal” (2) be translated as “to” and be indicating the purpose for people being **imprisoned** under the law, namely so that people would be ready for the coming faith in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “in order to lead us to believe in the good news that God was about to reveal” or “in order that we might be ready to believe the good news concerning Christ, the news that God would reveal later”
+3:23	rz75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν & πίστιν	2	The phrase **the faith** means “the faith in Jesus Christ.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the faith in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:23	t32j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰς τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “until the faith that God was about to reveal” or “until the faith that God would soon reveal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:24	we2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Here, the phrase **So then** is introducing a result. Use a natural form for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “Thus” or “Therefore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+3:24	mcdn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ νόμος, παιδαγωγὸς ἡμῶν γέγονεν	1	Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a **guardian**. If your readers would not understand what a **guardian** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning by using a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:24	amrv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	παιδαγωγὸς	1	In Paul’s culture a **guardian** was a slave whose job was to discipline and take care of a child who was not yet an adult. If your readers would not be familiar with this term you could either explain the meaning of this word in your translation, as modeled by the UST, or you could use the term from your culture that comes the closes to expressing the meaning of this word and then write a footnote explaining this word if you are using footnotes in your translation. Alternate translation: “custodian” or “guide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+3:24	ln1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	παιδαγωγὸς	1	Here, Paul speaks of **the law** as though it were a **guardian** whose job or role was to watch over people’s actions **until Christ** came. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “guide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+3:24	p30v			εἰς	1	See how you translated the word **until** in [3:23](../03/23.md).
+3:24	zick		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which **the law became our guardian until Christ** which was for the intended purpose that **we might be justified by faith** in Christ. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “with the purpose that” or “with the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+3:24	s8g5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθῶμεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God would declare us to be righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:24	j1xp			ἐκ πίστεως	1	See how you translated the phrase **by faith** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it is used with the same meaning.
+3:24	vj5u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ	1	Here, the word **by** is indicating the basis or source of God’s act of justifying sinners. It is indicating that **faith** is the basis on which **we might be justfied.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of” or “by means of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:24	kw1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:24	wuco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πίστεως	1	Here, the context implies (and also Paul’s use of the similar phrase “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md)), that the object of **faith** is **Christ**. If it would be helpful to your readers to state the object of faith here, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:25	x257		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast. What follows the word **But** is in contrast to the way things were in the era before Christ came. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+3:25	a4pk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trusting”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:25	meot		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς πίστεως	1	Here, the context implies that the object of **faith** is “Christ.” If it would be helpful to your readers to state the object of faith here, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:25	efvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ παιδαγωγόν	1	Here, Paul continues the metaphor he began in [3:24](../03/24.md) by continuing to speak of “the law” as if it were a **guardian**. If your readers would not understand what the term **guardian** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:25	be13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπὸ παιδαγωγόν	1	Here, Paul speaking of “the law” as though it were a person who was a **guardian**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+3:25	kjvy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ	1	Here, the word **under** means “under the supervision of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the supervision of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:25	gwst			παιδαγωγόν	1	See how you translated the word **guardian** in [3:24](../03/24.md).
+3:26	tzqa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	υἱοὶ	1	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women who have **faith in Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “sons and daughters” of “children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+3:26	u0ma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱοὶ	1	Paul speaks of the Galatian believers as if God was their biological, physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:26	mwku		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trusted,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:26	kht6			ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	The phrase **in Christ Jesus** could mean: (1) that the spiritual position of the Galatian believers was “in Christ Jesus.” Alternate translation: “being in union with Christ Jesus” or “you are in union with Christ Jesus” (2) that **Christ Jesus** was the object of Galatian believers faith. Alternate translation: “which is in Christ Jesus” or “towards Christ Jesus”
+3:27	p0dy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** indicates that what follows is an explanation giving the reason for why Paul said “you are all sons of God” in [3:26](../03/26.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing information which proves and/or explains a prior statement. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+3:27	yicn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσοι	1	The phrase **as many as** means “as many of you as.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many of you as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:27	h5ax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσοι & ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	The phrase **as many as have** means “all of you who have.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all of you who have been baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:27	v6n1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “a person” did it. Alternate translation: “someone has baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+3:27	ucuk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	Paul speaks of being **baptized into Christ** as if **Christ** were a physical location into which someone could be baptized. Here, **into Christ** refers to being spiritually united with Christ and coming into close spiritual union with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of this phrase plainly. Alternative translation: “have been baptized into close spiritual union with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:27	dgkv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε, Χριστὸν ἐνεδύσασθε	1	By speaking of baptism, Paul could be describing all of the things which belong to a believers initial conversion experience. Paul would then be associating all of them with one part of their conversion experience, water baptism, in which case baptism is an abbreviated way of referring conversion and the things that are part of it such as belief in Christ, baptism, and receiving Holy Spirit. If you decide that this is what Paul means here, and if it would help your readers, you could indicate this explicitly or you could explain this in a footnote if you are using them. Alternate translation: “God has saved have put on Christ” or “have believed in Christ have put on Christ” or “have experienced God’s salvation have put on Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+3:27	di9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Χριστὸν ἐνεδύσασθε	1	Paul speaks of **Christ** as if he were clothing that those who believe in him have **put on**. Here, when Paul says that all believers have **put on Christ** he means that all believers have identified with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of this phrase plainly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:28	srk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐκ ἔνι Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ, πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς εἷς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, the word **for** introduces the reason for why (if someone is a believer in Christ) it is as if there is no longer **Jew nor Greek** or **slave** or **free** or **male** or **female**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase (which follows the word **for**) gives the reason for the result that the first part of this verse describes. Alternate translation: “Because you are all one in Christ Jesus, there is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither slave nor free, there is neither male nor female” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+3:28	tu05		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔνι Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ, πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς εἷς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	In this verse, Paul’s point is that people who believe in Christ are no longer divided by racial, social, or gender distinctions but rather now have **one** common identity. This new common identity is that they are now **in (union with) Christ**. Paul is not saying that these human distinction no longer exist, rather he is saying that they now cease to be significant because believers have a new spiritual identity, which is being **in Christ**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “For you who are believers, it is now as if there is neither Jew nor Greek, or slave or free, or male or female” or “For you who believe in Christ, it is now as if there is neither Jew nor Greek, or slave or free, or male or female” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:28	aonk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ & Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ	1	If your readers would misunderstand these double negatives, you could translate each double negative using only one negative word. Alternate translation: “neither Jew or Greek, there is neither slave or free, there is neither male or female” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+3:28	zxfp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἕλλην	1	Here, the term **Greek** refers to non-Jewish people. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece or to people who speak the Greek language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:28	pfrh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλεύθερος	1	Here, the term **free** refers to people who are not slaves and thus are free from bondage to a master. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “free person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:28	fy09			γὰρ	1	Here, the word **for** introduces a reason. Use a natural form for introducing the reason for something that was said previously. Alternate translation: “because”
+3:28	fakq			πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς εἷς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “because all of you are together joined to the Messiah Jesus”
+3:28	mppd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἷς	1	Here, Paul uses the word **one** to indicate that all believers share the same equal position because of their new identity which they have by being **in Christ**. (Paul is further explaining his statement from the previous verse in which he says that all believers have “put on Christ”, meaning that they have a new and common identity which is derived from and centers on Christ). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what **one** means here. Alternate translation: “one person” or “one and the same standing” or “of equal standing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:28	pddu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul speaks of believers being **in Christ Jesus** as if **Christ Jesus** were a physical location into which someone could be. Here, **into Christ** refers to being spiritually united with Christ in a close spiritual union. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of this phrase plainly. Alternative translation: “have been baptized into close spiritual union with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:29	lnlp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, Paul is using the word **Now** to introduce new information. Use a natural form for introducing new information. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+3:29	ovzy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἄρα	1	Paul is using an **if … then” statement to express a hypothetical condition and what the result is for those people who meet the requirement of the condition. Paul is telling the Galatians that **if** they belong to Christ **then** they are Abrahams spiritual descendents. Use a natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical condition. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
+3:29	lth0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς & ἐστέ	1	Here, both occurrences of the word **you** are plural and refer to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark these forms as plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+3:29	wceh			ὑμεῖς Χριστοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “you are Christ’s” or “you belong to Christ”
+3:29	xwrj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	Here, the term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If your readers would not understand what **seed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. See how you translated the word **seed** in [3:16](../03/16.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:29	qp4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κληρονόμοι	1	Paul speaks of believers, who are the spiritual descendants **of Abraham**, as if they were **heirs** who were to inherit property and wealth from a family member. If your readers would not understand what **heirs** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+3:29	au7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν κληρονόμοι	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what the **heirs** will inherit. Alternate translation: “heirs of what God promised to Abraham and his descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+3:29	zxr0			κατ’	1	Alternate translation: “by way of”
+3:29	cu6z			ἐπαγγελίαν	1	See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
+4:intro	h6gw				0	# Galatians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Sonship\n\nSonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel’s sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham’s physical descendants inherited God’s promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them “children of promise.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Abba, Father\n“Abba” is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul “transliterates” its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+4:1	fr5u			κληρονόμος	1	# Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated the plural form of this word in [3:29](../03/29.md).
+4:1	vlu6			κύριος πάντων ὤν	1	Alternate translation: “though being master of all things” or “even though he is master of all things” or “even though he is the master of all the things he is going to inherit”
+4:2	eyfx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast and indicating that what follows is in contrast to what came before it in the preceding verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:2	jtpo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐστὶ	1	Here, the word **he** refers to “the heir” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heir is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:2	ppf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ	1	Here, the word **under** means “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:2	llwi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιτρόπους & καὶ οἰκονόμους	1	The terms **guardians** and **stewards** refer to two different roles but these terms do not necessarily refer to two different groups of people since one person could have responsibility for filling both roles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “someone who is his guardian and steward” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:2	bd5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐπιτρόπους	1	A guardian was a person who had the role of being responsible for a child. This person’s job was to supervise and care for the child whom they were in charge of make sure that the child was instructed in what they should do. Use a natural phrase or term in your language for describing this role. If you do not have this role in your culture you could describe it for your readers. Alternate translation: “people supervise a child” or “people who are in charge of a child” or “people who are in charge of a minor” or “people who are responsible for a minor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+4:2	v5g9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	οἰκονόμους	1	Here, the word **stewards** refers to people who are entrusted with the role of managing property until the child who is the heir is old enough to inherit it. Use a natural phrase or term in your language for describing this role. If you do not have this role in your culture you could describe it for your readers. Alternate translation: “people manage the child’s possessions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+4:2	khzl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προθεσμίας τοῦ πατρός	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the “father” did it. Alternate translation: “date which his father appointed” or “time which his father appointed”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+4:3	ocm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὕτως	1	Here, the word **So** indicates that what follows is comparable to, and similar in some way to what has just described in [4:1-2](../04/01.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing something that corresponds in some way to something that was introduced previously. Alternate translation: “In a similar way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+4:3	d6v9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἦμεν	1	# General Information:\n\nThe word **we** here refers to all Christians, including Paul’s readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+4:3	n21q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅτε ἦμεν νήπιοι	1	Paul speaks of people who have not yet trusted in Jesus as if they were **children**. If your readers would not understand what **children** means in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative as modeled by the UST or you could translate this phrase as a simile. Alternate translation: “when we did not yet believe in Jesus” or “when we were like children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:3	rwwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου ἤμεθα δεδουλωμένοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who was doing the action, Paul says that “the elemental principles of the world” were doing it. See the note on personification regarding **the elemental principles of this world**. Alternate translation: “the elemental principles of the world were enslaving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+4:3	cd2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δεδουλωμένοι	1	Paul speaks of being under the control of **the elemental principles of the world** as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslaved** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:3	l0fg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ	1	Here, the word **under** means “under the power of” or “under the authority of.” See how you translated the word **under** in [4:2](../04/02.md) where Paul uses it with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “under the power of” or “under the authority of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:3	v1zo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπὸ τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου & δεδουλωμένοι	1	Here, Paul speaks of **the elemental principles of the world** as though they were a person who could enslave other people. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Paul speaks of **the elemental principles of the world** as though they have the power to enslave a person but it is actually humans, who do not yet believe in the Messiah, who willing submit to these **elemental principles** and allow themselves to be enslaved. See [5:1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+4:3	u462			τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου	1	**the elemental principles of the world** could refer to: (1) the religious and/or moral teachings that people, whether they be a Jew or a non-Jew, seek to obey in order to please God and/or think of themselves as praiseworthy and good. (2) the things prescribed by the Mosaic law. 3) spiritual beings which people thought controlled **the world**.
+4:4	ogo3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The word **But** is introducing a contrast between the time prior to **when the fullness of time came**, which Paul described before this verse, and the time after **the fullness of time came**, which Paul describes in this verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:4	ujfp			τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ χρόνου	1	The phrase **the fullness of time** means “the right time” or “the time that God appointed.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the right time” or “the designated time” or “the appointed time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:4	opx2			γενόμενον ἐκ γυναικός	1	The phrase **born from a woman** is an idiom which means that someone is human. Because Jesus existed as God before he was born on earth the emphasis here is that Jesus became human, in addition to being fully God. If your readers would not understand this idiom means here, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “having taken on human nature” or “having become a human being in addition to his divine nature” or “having become a human” or “having been born as a human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+4:4	d9c7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γενόμενον ὑπὸ νόμον	1	The phrase **having been born under the law** means that Jesus, as a Jew, was under the jurisdiction of the law of Moses and therefore it was necessary that he obey it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “having been born under the jurisdiction and requirements of the law of Moses” or “having been born subject to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:4	mzwh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ νόμον	1	Here, the word **under** means “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the phrase **under the law** in [3:23](../03/23.md) where Paul uses the word **under** with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “under the authority of the law” or “under the jurisdiction of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:4	zt29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νόμον	1	Here, the phrase **the law** refers to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:5	cb45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **in order that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that” or “with the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+4:5	v5cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξαγοράσῃ	1	Paul uses the metaphor of a person buying back lost property or buying the freedom of a slave as a picture of God sending Jesus to pay the price for people’s sins by dying on the cross. If your readers would not understand what **redeem** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:5	awb9			ἐξαγοράσῃ	1	See how you translated the word “redeemed” in [3:13](../03/13.md).
+4:5	s6fw			ὑπὸ νόμον	1	See how you translated the phrase **under the law** in [3:23](../03/23.md) and [4:4](../04/04.md) where Paul uses this phrase with the same meaning.
+4:5	nppu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	2	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God redeemed **the ones under the law**, which was **so that** God could adopt them as his spiritual sons and daughters. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” or “with the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+4:5	eapv			τὴν υἱοθεσίαν ἀπολάβωμεν	1	Alternate translation: “God might adopt us as his sons”
+4:5	ii90		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀπολάβωμεν	1	The word **we** could refer to: (1) all Christians, both Jews and non-Jews, in which case **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (2) Jewish Christians only, in which case **we** would be exclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+4:5	tpqc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν υἱοθεσίαν ἀπολάβωμεν	1	Paul speaks of God giving people a close personal relationship with himself and giving them special rights and privileges as if it were **adoption**. If your readers would not understand what **adoption** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:5	jris		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱοθεσίαν	1	Paul speaks of those who believe in Jesus as if God was their biological, physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the word **sons** in [3:26](../03/26.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:5	lq4r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	υἱοθεσίαν	1	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “adoption as children” or “adoption as God’s children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+4:6	ahbp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Here, Paul is using the word **And** to introduce new information into his ongoing argument. Use a natural form for introducing new information. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+4:6	exc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The word **because** is introducing the reason that **God sent the Spirit of his Son into** the hearts of believers, namely because believers are God’s **sons**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:6	l2ny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	υἱοί	1	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+4:6	bikp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱοί	1	Paul speaks of the Galatian believers as if God was their biological, physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the word **sons** in [4:5](../04/25.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:6	yadl			τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	The phrase **the Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md), where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit.
+4:6	nei3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν	1	Here, the word **hearts** refers to the innermost part of a person. Paul is describing the innermost part of a person by association with their physical heart. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent term from your culture that is used to describe the center of a person’s inner being or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+4:6	s54r			κρᾶζον	1	The phrase **crying out** means “to call out loudly.” This phrase does not mean to cry or weep from sorrow.
+4:6	eqx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ	1	The word **Abba** is an Aramaic word meaning **Father** which the Jews used to address their fathers. Paul writes it as it sounds in Aramaic (he transliterates it) and then translates its meaning into Greek for his readers. Since the Aramaic word **Abba** is followed by the Greek word **Father**, it is best to transliterate **Abba** and then give its meaning in your language as Paul does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+4:7	jkor		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	The phrase **So then** introduces the result of what Paul explained in [4:6](../04/06.md). Use a natural form for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:7	akb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	εἶ	1	Here,**you** is singular. Paul is probably addressing the Galatian believers by using a singular pronoun in order to emphasize that what he is saying applies to each of them individually. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+4:7	iler		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δοῦλος	1	Paul speaks of the Galatian believers being in bondage to the law of Moses as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **a slave** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in bondage to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:7	fzja		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The word **but** is introducing a contrast. Paul is contrasting being **a son** with being **a slave**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:7	swk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱός & υἱός	1	See how you translated the word **sons** in [4:5](../04/05.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “a spiritual child of God … a spiritual child of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:7	vmyo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	υἱός & υἱός	1	Although the term **son** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a child … a child” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+4:7	rlc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ υἱός, καὶ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since each of you is a son, you are also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+4:7	d5hu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κληρονόμος	1	See how you translated the word **heir** in [4:1](../04/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:7	eujw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κληρονόμος	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that Paul is referring to inheriting the promises that God made to Abraham and his descendants. Alternate translation: “an heir of the promises made to Abraham” or “an heir of the promises God made to Abraham”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:7	po66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	διὰ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the word **through** is indicating agency. It is indicating that God is the agent by which the Galatians are to inherit the blessings God promised to Abraham and his descendants. Use a natural form for indicating the agency or means by which an action takes place. Alternate translation: “by means of God’s working” or “through God’s working” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+4:8	v4mp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The word **But** is introducing a contrast. Paul is contrasting the life of the Galatian believers before they believed in Christ with their life after they came to believe in Christ and as a result became God’s sons (which he explained in [4:1-7](../04/01.md)). Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:8	e21a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰδότες Θεὸν	1	Here, the phrase **known God** means “known God personally” and means more than simply having heard or known some things about God. The phrase **known God** refers to close relationship with God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having been in a relationship with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:8	ukf5			ἐδουλεύσατε	1	# Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated the word **enslaved** in [4:3](../04/03.md).
+4:8	yx8o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐδουλεύσατε τοῖς φύσει μὴ οὖσι θεοῖς	1	Paul speaks of the Galatians former way of life in which they practiced false religions and worshiped false gods as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what being **enslaved** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:8	cj5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς φύσει μὴ οὖσι θεοῖς	1	The phrase, **those, by nature, not being gods** refers to the beings which the Galatians served when they were pagans and were considered by them to be gods, but they were not really gods. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “false gods who were not really gods at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:9	i5p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:9	kv61			γνόντες & γνωσθέντες	1	Make sure that you translate the words **know** and **known** with the same type of expression as you used to translate the word “known” in [4:8](../04/08.md). The phrase “not having known God” in [4:8](../04/08.md) and the phrases **know God** and **known by God** in this verse are all referring to intimate personal knowledge that comes from a relationship with someone and not merely to being acquainted with someone or familiar with facts pertaining to them.
+4:9	cfka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωσθέντες ὑπὸ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “now that God came to know you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+4:9	wkt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς ἐπιστρέφετε πάλιν ἐπὶ τὰ ἀσθενῆ καὶ πτωχὰ στοιχεῖα	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+4:9	b8ue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιστρέφετε	1	Here, **turning** means to “to return.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “are you returning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:9	n5ie			τὰ ἀσθενῆ καὶ πτωχὰ στοιχεῖα	1	See how you decided to translate the phrase **elemental principles** in [Galatians 4:3](../04/03.md).
+4:9	w28k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οἷς πάλιν ἄνωθεν δουλεύειν θέλετε	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+4:9	s77e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἷς πάλιν ἄνωθεν δουλεύειν θέλετε	1	Here, **to be enslaved** is a metaphor for being obligated to obey certain rules and regulations. If your readers would not understand what being **enslaved** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. See how you chose to translate the word **enslaved** in [4:8](../04/08.md) where it is also used with a metaphorical use. Alternate translation: “to which once more you want to act like a slave who must obey his master” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:10	j8k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρατηρεῖσθε	1	Here, the word **observe** refers to observing something for religious purposes in order to gain God’s favor and approval. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You observe for religious purposes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:10	fd09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	παρατηρεῖσθε	1	The word **You** is plural here and refers to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+4:10	w7d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡμέρας & καὶ μῆνας, καὶ καιροὺς, καὶ ἐνιαυτούς	1	Paul is describing the different Jewish celebrations and religious observances (required in the law of Moses) by associating them with the times when they took place. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Jewish Sabbath days and other days prescribed in the law of Moses. You also observe the monthly Jewish celebrations and annual Jewish festivals as well the Jewish sacred years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+4:11	ct4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	φοβοῦμαι	1	Here, the phrase **I am afraid** means “I am concerned about.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:11	yytt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμᾶς & ὑμᾶς	1	Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are plural and refer to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+4:11	chxa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μή πως εἰκῇ κεκοπίακα εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “that I have possibly labored among you for nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+4:11	alfd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κεκοπίακα	1	Here, the word **labored** refers to Paul’s work of teaching the Galatians the truths of the Christian faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have labored in teaching and preaching” or “I have taught the truths of the Christian faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:11	bsv1			εἰκῇ	1	Alternate translation: “without results” or “to no avail” or “purposelessly”
+4:12	mad2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	οἴδατε & ὑμῖν	1	In this verse both occurrences of the word **you** are plural and refer to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+4:12	p9gn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the word **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+4:12	gteu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γίνεσθε ὡς ἐγώ, ὅτι κἀγὼ ὡς ὑμεῖς	1	Here, Paul is referring to obeying the rules and regulations prescribed in the law of Moses. He is asking the Galatians to become like himself by not acting as if the law of Moses has authority over his life, because he originally became as they were, when they did not seek to conduct their lives according to the rules prescribed in the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:12	b4w2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γίνεσθε ὡς ἐγώ, ὅτι κἀγὼ ὡς ὑμεῖς	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because I became as you, you also should become as I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:12	cg8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	κἀγὼ ὡς ὑμεῖς	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Here, the implied words are **became** and **are**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context as modeled by the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+4:12	n3wf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐδέν με ἠδικήσατε	1	Here. Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “You treated me well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+4:13	ytex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Paul is using the word **Now** to introduce background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])m
+4:13	a22l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	δι’ ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς, εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν	1	Here, Paul states that it was a physical sickness that previously caused him to proclaim the gospel to Galatians. This could mean that (1) Paul was already in Galatia and a physical sickness caused Paul to stay in Galatia longer and recover and because of this delay he had time and opportunity to proclaim the gospel to the Galatians (2) because of a physical sickness Paul went to Galatia to recover from his sickness and while there he proclaimed the gospel to the Galatians. Because Paul does not explicitly state which of these two scenarios provided the opportunity for him to preach the gospel, but rather simply focuses on the sickness, you should not further explain what Paul says here about his sickness but rather use a general expression as modeled by the ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+4:13	ho2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’	1	Here, Paul is using the phrase **because** to introduce the reason that he **proclaimed the gospel** to the Galatians **previously**, which was **because** he had to stay in Galatia because of a physical sickness. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason-result clause. (Here, the reason is **a weakness of the flesh** and the result is that Paul **proclaimed the gospel to** the Galatians). Alternate translation: “on account of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:13	qstf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weakness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “weak”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+4:13	iuz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῆς σαρκὸς	1	Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase **the flesh** in [2:20](../02/20.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the body” or “of my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+4:14	tk1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τὸν πειρασμὸν ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου	1	The phrase **your trial in my flesh** means that Paul had some physical problem or malady that either itself caused difficulty (a **trial**) for the Galatians or caused difficulty (a **trial**) for them because they had to care for or help him as a result of his difficulty. Because Paul does not specify the specifics of how his physical malady created a **trial** for the Galatians, it is best to translate this phrase with a general phrase which leaves room for either possibility as modeled by the ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+4:14	v9xa			οὐκ ἐξουθενήσατε	1	Alternate translation: “you did not scorn” or “you did not hate”
+4:14	h3vm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν πειρασμὸν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trial**, you could express the same idea some other way that would be natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+4:14	qz18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σαρκί	1	Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase **the flesh** in [2:20](../02/20.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+4:14	l244		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς ἄγγελον Θεοῦ	1	The phrase **as an angel of God** means “as if I were an angel of God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as if I were an angel of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:14	gbhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	The phrase **as Christ Jesus** means “as you would welcome Christ Jesus.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as you would welcome Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:15	ard2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ποῦ οὖν ὁ μακαρισμὸς ὑμῶν	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to show the Galatian believers his disappointment and in order to cause them to think about what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+4:15	kcer		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μακαρισμὸς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blessing**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+4:15	paah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Here, the word **For** introduces information which proves how the Galatians had previously felt about Paul. Use a natural form in your language for introducing this material. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+4:15	ogmb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν ἐξορύξαντες, ἐδώκατέ μοι	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers remember the way that they formerly felt and thought about Paul. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “if it were possible that you could have torn out your eyes and then given the to me, you would have done so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+4:15	o5tg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰ δυνατὸν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if it were possible for you to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+4:15	wyyt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν ἐξορύξαντες, ἐδώκατέ μοι	1	The phrase **having torn out your eyes, you would have given them to me** could: (1) be an idiom indicating the great love and devotion which the Galatians formerly had for Paul. In Paul’s time the eyes were considered a person’s most precious possession so if it were possible for a person to take out their eyes and give them to another person this would be a sign of extreme devotion and love towards the person to whom they were given. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you formerly loved me very much and would have given me your most valued possessions to show me your love” (2) indicate that Paul had some type of disease and by Paul saying this here he is indicating the great concern which the Galatians had formerly shown for him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+4:16	i73s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Paul is using the phrase **So then** to introduce a reason-result clause in which **speaking truth** to the Galatians is the reason, and them acting as if Paul were their **enemy** is the result. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason-result clause. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Therefore, as a result of” or “So then, as a result of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:16	zznv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐχθρὸς ὑμῶν γέγονα, ἀληθεύων ὑμῖν	1	The phrase **speaking truth to you, have I become your enemy** could be: (1) a rhetorical question in which Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to show the Galatian believers his disappointment with them and in order to cause them to think about what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (2) a statement in which Paul is telling the Galatians that based on the way they are acting it seems as if he has now become their enemy by telling them the truth. Alternate translation: “as a result of my speaking the truth to you, you are acting as if I have become your enemy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+4:16	mhkl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθεύων ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “true”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by telling you things that are true” or Alternate translation: “because I have told you what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+4:17	dxtd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζηλοῦσιν & θέλουσιν	1	In this verse, the pronouns **They** and **they** both refer to the false teachers who were Judaizers and were teaching the Galatians false things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The false teachers are zealous … these false teachers desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:17	lt7y			οὐ καλῶς	1	Alternate translation: “but not in a good way” or “but not in a way that is right” or “but their intentions are not good”
+4:17	rulh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, the word **but** is introducing a contrast. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:17	s9kn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκκλεῖσαι ὑμᾶς	1	Here, the the phrase **to separate you** refers to separating the Galatian believers from Paul and probably also not only from Paul but also from his ministry partners because they all taught a gospel message that was different from what the false teachers were teaching to the Galatian believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly who Paul is saying that the false teachers are trying to separate the Galatian believers from as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “to separate you from us” or “to shut you out from us” or “to make you stop being loyal to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:17	wrvk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which the false teachers desired **to separate** the Galatian believers from Paul and his ministry partners. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+4:17	iv1d			αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε	1	Alternate translation: “you would be devoted to them” or “you would be attached to them”.
+4:18	hjp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	The word **But** could: (1) be introducing a contrast. Use a natural form for introducing a contrast. (2) be introducing additional comments that Paul wants to make regarding what he has just finished saying prior to this verse. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+4:18	m5m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καλῷ	1	Here, the word **good** refers to “good things.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “good things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:19	u3eb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνα μου	1	Paul speaks of the Galatian believers as if they were his **children** and he was their mother. Paul calls the Galatian believers his **children** because they believed in Jesus as a result of Paul proclaiming the gospel to them. The Galatian believers experienced their spiritual birth as a result of Paul’s work of proclaiming the gospel to them, so he was their spiritual mother and they were his spiritual children. If your readers would not understand what **children** means in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You who believed the message about Jesus that I proclaimed to you” or “My spiritual children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:19	yf9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πάλιν ὠδίνω	1	Paul speaks of his work of seeking to help the Galatians grow in spiritual maturity, and the mental and physical suffering he endured as a result of this work, as if it were the **labor** that a mother endures when giving birth to a child. If it would be helpful to your readers you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “I am again in anguish as though I am a woman giving birth” or “it is as if I am in labor again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:19	u9fp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	μορφωθῇ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν	1	The phrase **Christ would be formed in you** could be: (1) synecdoche in which case Paul is using the word **Christ** to refer to being a mature follower of Christ who is mature in their thinking and whose actions resemble Christ’s actions. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Christ’s nature becomes fully developed in you” or “you become a mature follower of Christ” or “you resemble Christ in your actions and in your thinking” (2) be a metaphor in which case Paul is describing the Galatian believers as if they were mothers and Christ was being formed inside them. Alternate translation: “Christ's nature becomes developed in you completely and wholeheartedly as a child becomes developed in his mother's womb” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+4:19	k4fo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μορφωθῇ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forms Christ in you” or “God would form Christ in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+4:20	csin			δὲ	1	Alternate translation: “and”
+4:20	ucgi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἤθελον & παρεῖναι πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἄρτι, καὶ ἀλλάξαι τὴν φωνήν μου, ὅτι ἀποροῦμαι ἐν ὑμῖν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because I am perplexed about you, I am desiring to be present with you now and to change my tone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:20	j8on		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλάξαι τὴν φωνήν μου	1	The phrase **change my tone** refers to Paul “changing the manner of his communication” towards the Galatians from being stern and rebuking to being more affectionate. Paul loved the Galatian believers, however, because of the serious nature of the false teaching which the Galatians were being tempted to accept, combined with Paul’s physical distance from the Galatians, he felt that he needed to write to them and firmly and sternly correct their false thinking with the hope that they would not believe or follow false teaching. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what the phrase **change my tone** means here. Alternate translation: “to speak in a different manner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:21	z1um			λέγετέ μοι	1	Alternate translation: “I want to ask a question” or “I want to tell you something”
+4:21	sf5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	οἱ	1	Here, the word **you** is plural. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+4:21	y3km			θέλοντες	1	See how you translated the word **desiring** in [4:20](../04/20.md).
+4:21	ysq4			ὑπὸ νόμον	1	See how you translated the phrase **under the law** in [3:23](../03/23.md). Paul uses this phrase with the same meaning in [3:23](../03/23.md), [4:4](../04/04.md), and [4:5](../04/05.md).
+4:21	u6fs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τὸν νόμον οὐκ ἀκούετε	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to cause the Galatian believers to think about and reflect on what he is going to say next. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you need to learn what the law really says” or “let me tell you what the law really says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+4:21	kw9j			τὸν νόμον οὐκ ἀκούετε	1	Alternate translation: “do you not comprehend what the law is teaching” or “do you not understand what the law is actually teaching”
+4:22	fkbv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γέγραπται	1	Here, Paul uses **it is written** to mean that it is written in the Old Testament Scriptures. Paul assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “it has been written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:22	gthm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, “Moses” did it. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” or “Moses wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+4:22	ljse		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	Ἀβραὰμ δύο υἱοὺς ἔσχεν; ἕνα ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης, καὶ ἕνα ἐκ τῆς ἐλευθέρας	1	In this verse and in all of [4:23](../04/23.md) Paul is summarizing a story from the book of Genesis and is not directly quoting Scripture so you should not use quotation marks or anything else that might cause your readers to think that Paul is directly quoting Scripture here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+4:22	wbg3			ἕνα ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης, καὶ ἕνα ἐκ τῆς ἐλευθέρας	1	Alternate translation: “one son from the slave girl and one son from the free woman”
+4:23	djsd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλ’	1	Here, Paul is using the word **And** to introduce additional information regarding the two sons mentioned in [4:22](../04/22.md). In the remainder of this verse Paul contrasts the way in which the two sons were born. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+4:23	bthj			παιδίσκης & ἐλευθέρας	1	See how you translated **slave girl** and **free woman** in [4:22](../04/22.md).
+4:23	s2pc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ σάρκα	1	Here, the phrase **according to the flesh** means that Ishmael was born in the natural way by which all children are born, without God intervening and performing a miracle. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the natural way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:23	wjvp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast. It is introducing a contrast between Ishmael, **the one** who **was born from the slave girl according to the flesh** and Isaac, who was born **from the free woman, through promise**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:23	qnl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ἐπαγγελίας	1	Here, the phrase **through promise** means “through God’s promise to Abraham” and refers to God supernaturally intervening and enabling Abraham’s wife Sarah (**the free woman**) to become pregnant in order to fulfill his **promise** to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “through God’s promise to Abraham” or “was conceived supernaturally as a result of what God had promised Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:23	e2i9			ἐπαγγελίας	1	See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
+4:24	jfuz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἅτινά	1	**These things** refers to the **things** Paul has just described in [4:22-23](../04/22.md) regarding Abraham, his two sons, and Hagar and Sarah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These events I have just described to you” or “These things I have just described to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:24	rilp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἅτινά ἐστιν ἀλληγορούμενα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “he” is doing it. Alternate translation: “I am speaking of these things allegorically” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+4:24	k5qu			ἅτινά ἐστιν ἀλληγορούμενα	1	An **allegory** is a story in which things within the story are interpreted as representing something else. Here, the things in the story are meant to be interpreted as representing spiritual truths and realities. In this allegory, the two women referred to in [4:22](../04/22.md) represent two different covenants. If your language has a word or phrase to describe what an **allegory** is you can use that here. Alternately, if it would help your readers, you can describe what an allegory is in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am speaking of these things in order to teach you a spiritual truth” or “I am speaking of these things in order to use them as an analogy so that I can teach you an important truth”
+4:24	b120		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὗται	1	Here, the word **they** refers to Sarah and Hagar. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “these women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:24	mfa9			διαθῆκαι	1	See how you translated the word “covenant” in [3:15](../03/15.md).
+4:24	mt7j			μία	1	The word **One** here could refer to: (1) the covenant which God made at Mount Sinai which resulted in spiritual slavery to the law. Alternate translation: “One covenant” (2) Hagar in which case Paul means that she corresponds to Mount Sinai (See [4:25](../04/25.md)) and gave birth to children destined for slavery. Alternate translation: “One woman”
+4:24	u4hr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Ὄρους Σινά	1	Paul uses **Mount Sinai** to refer to the covenant with the laws that Moses gave to the Israelites there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use plain language to express this. Alternate translation: “Mount Sinai, where Moses received the law and gave it to Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+4:24	aani		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς δουλείαν γεννῶσα	1	Paul speaks of the law of Moses “producing” or “resulting in” something as if the process of “producing” were **giving birth**. Paul speaks of the “spiritual bondage” of being under the law of Moses as if it were **slavery**. Paul is saying the the law of Moses “produces spiritual slavery.” If your readers would not understand what **giving birth** or **slavery** mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and produces spiritual slavery” or “and results in spiritual slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:24	e3rc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δουλείαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slavery**, you could express the same idea with a concrete noun such as “slave”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+4:25	u1cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ&Ἁγὰρ Σινά Ὄρος ἐστὶν	1	**Hagar is Mount Sinai** means that “Hagar symbolizes Mount Sinai.” Here, Paul begin to explain the meaning of the allegory which he began in [4:22](../04/22.md). If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly what the phrase **Hagar is Mount Sinai** means here as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “Hagar represents Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:25	klcv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸ&Ἁγὰρ Σινά Ὄρος ἐστὶν ἐν τῇ Ἀραβίᾳ	1	Paul uses **Mount Sinai in Arabia** to refer to the covenant with the laws that Moses gave to the Israelites there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use plain language to express this. Alternate translation: “Hagar resembles Mount Sinai in Arabia, where Moses received the law and gave it to Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+4:25	azzt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	συνστοιχεῖ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. The words that Paul leaves out could be: (1) Hagar. Alternate translation: “Hagar corresponds” (2) Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “Mount Sinai corresponds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+4:25	xvhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	νῦν Ἰερουσαλήμ, δουλεύει γὰρ	1	Paul is describing the religion of Judaism (which emphasized obeying the law of Moses) by association with the city of Jerusalem, which was the center of this religion. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “religion of Judaism, for all who follow this religion are in slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+4:25	bonn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δουλεύει γὰρ μετὰ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς	1	Paul speaks of the religion of Judaism, with its emphasis on obeying the law of Moses, as being **in slavery**. Here, Paul uses the word **slavery** to refer to the ”spiritual bondage“ that seeking to obey the religious system based on the law of Moses creates for those who seek to obey it as a means of meriting God’s approval. Here, **slavery** refers to “spiritual bondage” and **children** refers to those people who seek to obey the law of Moses as a means of meriting God’s approval. If your readers would not understand what **slavery** and **children** mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “for Jerusalem represents the religious system of Judaism, which results in spiritual bondage for all those practice it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:25	frft		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	δουλεύει&μετὰ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς	1	Here, Paul refers to the city of **Jerusalem** as though it were a woman (**she** and **her**) who could be **in slavery** and have **children**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem represents the religious system of Judaism, which results in spiritual bondage for all those practice it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+4:25	flc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δουλεύει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slavery**, you could express the same idea with a concrete noun such as “slave”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+4:26	busv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast between “the present Jerusalem” mentioned in [425:](../04/25.md) and **the Jerusalem above** in this verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:26	qsz6			ἡ&ἄνω Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	The phrase **the Jerusalem above** could refer to: (1) the heavenly city of God. Alternate translation: “the heavenly Jerusalem” (2) all Christians and be referring to the Christian church which is comprised of all those who believe in Jesus. REVISIT-SEE SIL EX SUMM PG 175
+4:26	qpxq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλευθέρα	1	Here, the word **free** refers to spiritual freedom and freedom from the law and sin. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “spiritually free” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:26	iwg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἥτις ἐστὶν μήτηρ ἡμῶν	1	Paul speaks of **the Jerusalem above** as if it was were the **mother**. If your readers would not understand what **mother** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. REVISIT-SEE SIL EX SUMM PG 175 Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:26	c4qu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μήτηρ ἡμῶν	1	Paul speaks of **the Jerusalem above** as if it was were a **mother**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+4:26	ijkp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	When Paul says **our**, he is speaking of all believers in Jesus, which would include himself and the Galatian believers, so **our** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+4:27	kfc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	Here, Paul uses the word **For** to indicate that he is introducing material which supports what he said in [4:26](../04/26.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing information which supports a prior claim. (See:[[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+4:27	jt53			γέγραπται	1	Here, Paul uses the phrase it is written to indicate that what follows is a quotation from the Old Testament Scriptures. Paul assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+4:27	ummm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the prophet “Isaiah” did it. Alternate translation: “Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+4:27	jql2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	εὐφράνθητι, στεῖρα, ἡ οὐ τίκτουσα, ῥῆξον καὶ βόησον, ἡ οὐκ ὠδίνουσα, ὅτι πολλὰ τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐρήμου μᾶλλον, ἢ τῆς ἐχούσης τὸν ἄνδρα	1	This is a quotation from Isaiah 54:1. Use a natural way of indicating that something is a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+4:27	y6x4				0	
+4:27	scqa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The word **because** is introducing the reason to **Rejoice**. Use a natural form for introducing a reason to do something. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:28	jfx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Here, Paul uses the word **Now** to indicate that what he writes next is connected to what he wrote immediately before this and that he is continuing his line of thought. Use a natural form in your language to indicate that what follows is in continuity with what precedes it. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+4:28	oyo4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὑμεῖς&ἀδελφοί, κατὰ Ἰσαὰκ, ἐπαγγελίας τέκνα ἐστέ	1	The point of this comparison is that anyone who will be like, who . If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+4:28	p45d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς	1	Here, the pronoun **you** is plural. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+4:28	ad75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the word **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+4:28	ct63		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπαγγελίας τέκνα	1	Here, **children** could: (1) be a metaphor which means “God’s spiritual descendants.” Alternate translation: “God’s spiritual descendants” or “God’s children” (2) be a metaphor which means “Abraham’s spiritual descendants.” Alternate translation: “Abraham’s spiritual descendants” or “Abraham’s children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:28	u3dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπαγγελίας τέκνα	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the source of **children**. He means that the **children** are the **children** or “descendants” which God promised to supernaturally give to Abraham and therefore they are **children** whose source derives from God fulfillment of his **promise** to Abraham. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “children of God’s promise” or “children of God’s promise to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+4:28	u9t0			ἐπαγγελίας	1	See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md).
+4:29	c9lf			κατὰ σάρκα	1	See how you translated the phrase **according to flesh** in [4:23](../04/23.md).
+4:29	gt1e			κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	Here, **according to Spirit** means Isaac was born in a supernatural way, through the power of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “because of the Spirit” or “because of the work of the Spirit”
+4:29	jff1			Πνεῦμα	1	The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit.
+4:30	ca1m			ἀλλὰ	1	
+4:30	a2xo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to get the Galatian believers to think about the scripture verse he cites next. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+4:30	klbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	λέγει ἡ Γραφή	1	Here, Paul speaks of the **scripture** passage he is quoting from Genesis as though it were a were a person who could speak . If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “does Moses say in the scripture” or “does Moses write in the scripture”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+4:30	kg1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ἔκβαλε τὴν παιδίσκην καὶ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτῆς; οὐ γὰρ μὴ κληρονομήσει ὁ υἱὸς τῆς παιδίσκης, μετὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τῆς ἐλευθέρας	1	This is a quotation from Genesis. Use a natural way of indicating that something is a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+4:30	mjj5			κληρονομήσει	1	See how you translated the similar word “inheritance” in [3:18](../03/18.md).
+4:31	g74v			διό	1	
+4:31	sy8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the word **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+4:31	iz3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνα	1	Paul speaks of “spiritual descendants” as if they were **children**. If your readers would not understand what **children** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:31	ily3			ἀλλὰ	1	
+5:intro	bcg3				0	# Galatians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. In this chapter Paul declares repeatedly that Christ has freed believers from being obligated to obey the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Fruit of the Spirit\n\nThe phrase “the fruit of the Spirit” is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. The word “fruit” is singular and refers to the nine qualities listed in [5:22–23](../05/22.md) to show that they are a united cluster of qualities that are manifested in each believer. Translators should keep the singular form for “fruit” if possible. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
+5:1	kuu9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, ἡμᾶς Χριστὸς ἠλευθέρωσεν	1	**For freedom Christ set us free** implies that Christ **set** believers **free** from being required to obey the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Christ has set us free from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:1	dt67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the purpose for which Christ freed believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose. Alternate translation: “For the purpose of freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+5:1	hh1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ&δουλείας	1	See how you translated **freedom** in [2:4](../02/04.md) and **slavery** in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:1	wfny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	When Paul says **us** here, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+5:1	j679		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	στήκετε	1	**Stand firm** here refers to someone remaining steadfast in what one believes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be unmoved” or “Remain strong in your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:1	eamw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ πάλιν&ἐνέχεσθε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not again subject yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:1	ovu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ πάλιν ζυγῷ δουλείας ἐνέχεσθε	1	Here Paul speaks of someone being obligated to obey the laws God gave the Jews as if that person were **subjected to a yoke of slavery.** If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “do not go back to being obligated to obey the law” or “do not be subjected to the law like one who is under a yoke of slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:1	f969		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ζυγῷ δουλείας	1	James is using the possessive form to describe a **yoke** that is **slavery**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a yoke, that is, slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+5:2	bki6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1	Paul uses the term **Behold** to focus his audience’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:2	lrsx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐὰν περιτέμνησθε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone circumcises you” or “if you receive circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:2	vk9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Χριστὸς ὑμᾶς οὐδὲν ὠφελήσει.	1	In this clause Paul means that if a person is circumcised in order to receive salvation, then what Christ has done to provide salvation for them will not help them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Christ has done will not benefit you at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:3	h4q5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	περιτεμνομένῳ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who has someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:3	iqy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅλον τὸν νόμον ποιῆσαι	1	Paul implies that a **circumcised** man must obey **the whole law** in order to be righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to do the whole law to become righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:3	cwlk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ὅλον τὸν νόμον	1	Here, **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. See how **law** is translated in [2:16](../02/16.md) and [Romans 2:12](../../rom/02/12.md). Alternate translation: “all of God’s laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+5:4	v01q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατηργήθητε ἀπὸ Χριστοῦ, οἵτινες ἐν νόμῳ δικαιοῦσθε	1	**You** here refers to **whoever is being justified by the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “You who are being justified by the law were cut off from Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+5:4	wsls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηργήθητε&δικαιοῦσθε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You cut yourselves off … is justifying oneself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:4	h4yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατηργήθητε ἀπὸ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, **cut off** refers to being separated from Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You have ended your relationship with Christ” or “You are separated from Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:4	ipf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἵτινες ἐν νόμῳ δικαιοῦσθε	1	Paul implies that these people were trying to be **justified by** obeying **the law,** which is impossible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever attempts to be justified by obeying the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:4	ygbj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμῳ	1	See how you translated **law** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+5:4	k6xe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς χάριτος ἐξεπέσατε	1	Here Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were something that a person could fall away from. He means that people who are trying to save themselves by obeying the law do not receive God’s **grace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you have rejected the grace of God” or “God will no longer be gracious to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:5	nabj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul stated in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:5	kvpn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πνεύματι	1	Here and throughout this chapter, **the Spirit** refers to the Holy **Spirit**. See how you translated the same use of **Spirit** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:5	vvk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως&ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith**, **hope**, and **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated **faith** in [2:16](../02/16.md) and **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md). Alternate translation: “by trusting … what is hopeful of what it righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:5	pdm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Here, **we** refers to Paul and those who trust in Christ instead of the law, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+5:5	qg9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἡμεῖς&ἐκ πίστεως ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης ἀπεκδεχόμεθα	1	This could mean: (1) **we eagerly wait** **by faith**. Alternate translation: “we eagerly wait by faith for the hope of righteousness” (2) **righteousness** is **by faith**. Alternate translation: “we eagerly wait for the hope of righteousness by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+5:5	xtqp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης	1	This could mean: (1) people **hope** for **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the hope for righteousness” (2) **the hope** is **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the hope, that is, righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+5:6	rn0r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is a reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:6	bhdg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν&Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in [3:26](../03/26.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:6	y2ww		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομή&ἀκροβυστία&πίστις&ἀγάπης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision**, **uncircumcision**, **faith**, and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated **faith** in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “being circumcised … not being circumcised … trusting … loving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:6	qp6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὔτε περιτομή τι ἰσχύει, οὔτε ἀκροβυστία	1	Here, **anything** refers to being important to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither circumcision nor uncircumcision is capable of being important to God” or “neither circumcision nor uncircumcision matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+5:6	bw6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πίστις δι’ ἀγάπης ἐνεργουμένη	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “faith working through love is capable of something” or “faith working through love matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+5:7	jj48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐτρέχετε καλῶς	1	Here Paul refers to becoming more spiritually mature as if someone were **running** a race. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You were making excellent progress in your faith” or “you were doing so well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:7	ntd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ὑμᾶς ἐνέκοψεν, ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not let have let someone hinder you, not to be persuaded by truth!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+5:7	w0iq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι	1	This clause provides the expected result of what Paul said in the previous clause. Use a natural form for indicating a result. Alternate translation: “which is resulting in you not being persuaded by truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:7	bmy4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the truth is not persuading you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:7	vuf8			ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι	1	The phrase translated as **not to be persuaded by truth** could also be translated as “not to obey the truth.”
+5:7	krep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθείᾳ	1	See how you translated **truth** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:8	sx6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ πεισμονὴ	1	Here, **persuasion** refers to some Galatians being persuaded to obey the laws God gave the Jews instead of trusting in Jesus for salvation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You being persuaded to stop trusting in the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:8	bqxm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦ καλοῦντος ὑμᾶς	1	Here, **the one calling you** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who is calling you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+5:9	q926		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs	μικρὰ ζύμη ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ	1	Here Paul quotes or creates a proverb, which is a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb gives a comparison: Just as a small amount of **leaven** **leavens** a whole **lump** of dough, so a small amount of false teaching can deceive many people in a church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “It has been said that a little leaven causes a whole lump of dough to be leavened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
+5:9	xds5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μικρὰ ζύμη ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ	1	The word **leaven** refers to a substance that causes fermentation and expansion within a batch of dough or batter. Here, **leavens** refers to the fermentation process and **lump** refers to the batch of dough. If your readers would not be familiar with **leaven**, you could use the name of a substance that they would be familiar with, or you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “A little yeast causes all of the batch of dough to swell up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+5:10	usoc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Here, **in the Lord** indicates the basis or cause for which Paul was **confident in** the Galatian believers, and **the Lord** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar expression “in Christ” in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “on the basis of us being in union with the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:10	enp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδὲν ἄλλο φρονήσετε	1	Here, **nothing otherwise** refers to **nothing** other than what Paul has told his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will think nothing other than what I am telling you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:10	jc72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὁ&ταράσσων ὑμᾶς&ὅστις ἐὰν ᾖ	1	Jesus is speaking of several people who were **troubling** the Galatian believers, not just one particular man. Paul states in [1:7](../01/07.md) that there were several false teachers causing trouble. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “those troubling you … whoever they may be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+5:10	llh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	βαστάσει τὸ κρίμα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:11	nv5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the same use of **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+5:11	d4mm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἐγὼ&εἰ περιτομὴν ἔτι κηρύσσω, τί ἔτι διώκομαι	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help emphasize that he does not **proclaim circumcision**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “were I still proclaiming circumcision, then why am I still being persecuted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+5:11	gaq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	περιτομὴν&κηρύσσω	1	Here, **proclaim circumcision** refers to telling people that they must be circumcised in order to be saved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “proclaim the need to be circumcised” or “proclaim that everyone must be circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+5:11	wgui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομὴν	1	See how you translated **circumcision** in [verse 6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:11	hgo8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι διώκομαι?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I would not still be persecuted!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+5:11	y3ug		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τί ἔτι διώκομαι&κατήργηται τὸ σκάνδαλον τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “why are people still persecuting me … I would have removed the stumbling block of the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:11	l5tk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄρα κατήργηται τὸ σκάνδαλον τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	This sentence gives both the result of proclaiming **circumcision** and the reason why someone who proclaimed **circumcision** would not be **persecuted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would not be persecuted because proclaiming circumcision would remove the stumbling block of the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:11	z2hj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ σκάνδαλον τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the stumbling block** that is **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the stumbling block, that is, the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+5:11	arj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ σκάνδαλον	1	Here, **stumbling block** refers to something that offends people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the offense” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:11	nipj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	Here, **the cross** refers to Christ’s sacrificial death on the cross, which was a very offensive way to die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of what Jesus did when he died on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+5:12	e7c2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὄφελον καὶ ἀποκόψονται, οἱ ἀναστατοῦντες ὑμᾶς	1	If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “O how I wish that the ones disturbing you would even castrate themselves!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+5:12	sfl2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἀποκόψονται	1	This could mean: (1) Paul wished that the false teachers who wanted to circumcise the Galatian believers would cut off their male organs, as stated literally in the ULT. (2) Paul wished that the false teachers would leave the Christian community. Alternate translation: “will even remove themselves from among you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:13	y1g7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	**For** here could indicate: (1) Paul is transitioning back to the topic he introduced in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (2) the reason for the harsh words Paul said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I wish they would do so because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+5:13	ekb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς&ἐπ’ ἐλευθερίᾳ ἐκλήθητε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has called you to freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:13	w433		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλευθερίᾳ&τὴν ἐλευθερίαν	1	Here, **freedom** implies that Christ sets believers free from being required to obey the laws God gave the Jews. See how you translated the similar expression in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “freedom from the law … that freedom from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:13	dgaf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλευθερίᾳ&ἐλευθερίαν	1	See how you translated **freedom** in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:13	yp6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the same use of **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+5:13	b62s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀφορμὴν τῇ σαρκί	1	Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who could take advantage of **an opportunity**. He is referring to believers thinking they can sin because they do not have to obey the laws God gave the Jews . If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “an opportunity to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]).
+5:13	viv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ σαρκί	1	Here Paul uses **flesh** to refer to sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for your sinful nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:13	ierd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς ἀγάπης	1	Here, **through** indicates the means by which believers should **serve one another**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:13	iki8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀγάπης	1	See how you translated **love** in [verse 6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:14	cu9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul’s readers should obey the command he gave in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “You must do this for one another because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:14	ct8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ&πᾶς νόμος ἐν ἑνὶ λόγῳ πεπλήρωται	1	This could mean: (1) this **one command** sums up **all the law**. Alternate translation: “all the law is summed up in just one command” (2) someone who obeys this **one command** obeys **all the law**. Alternate translation: “by obeying one commandment, you obey the whole law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:14	eaeo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ&πᾶς νόμος ἐν ἑνὶ λόγῳ πεπλήρωται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “one command has fulfilled all the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:14	pda2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ&νόμος	1	See how you translated **law** in the [2:16](../02/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+5:14	qt9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1	The words **you**, **your**, and **yourself** are singular here because, even though Moses said this to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was supposed to obey this command. So in your translation, use the singular forms of **you**, **your**, and **yourself** in this verse, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+5:14	zdv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1	**You will love** is a statement that Moses uses to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You must love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+5:15	yk60		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰ δὲ ἀλλήλους δάκνετε καὶ κατεσθίετε	1	Here Paul speaks of the Galatian believers fighting each other as if they were wild animals that attack each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “if you are mistreating and hurting one another” or “if you are acting like wild animals that bite and devour one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:15	l2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ὑπ’ ἀλλήλων ἀναλωθῆτε	1	Here Paul speaks of the Galatian believers fighting each other as if they were wild animals that eat each other. Here **consumed** could mean: (1) the believers themselves would be destroyed. Alternate translation: “you might not be destroyed by one another” (2) the fellowship of Galatian believers would be destroyed. Alternate translation: “your group of believers might not be destroyed by one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:15	itx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ ὑπ’ ἀλλήλων ἀναλωθῆτε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might not consume one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:16	yb58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Πνεύματι περιπατεῖτε	1	Here Paul uses **walk** to refer to how a person lives and behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “act by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:16	tk8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πνεύματι	1	The phrase **by the Spirit** implies being directed or controlled by the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the direction of the Holy Spirit” or “according to how the Holy Spirit leads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:16	ut3t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+5:16	dyj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς οὐ μὴ τελέσητε	1	The phrase **you would certainly not fulfill desires** refers to not doing what someone sinfully wants to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you would certainly not do what the flesh desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+5:16	iron		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **desires**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what the flesh desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:16	rl5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς	1	Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who has **desires**. He is referring to what a person wants to do as a result of having a sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how this phrase is translated in [Romans 13:14](../../rom/13/14.md). Alternate translation: “what you want to do because of your sinful nature” or “the things you want to do because you are sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]).
+5:16	w8a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σαρκὸς	1	Here Paul uses **flesh** to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated this **flesh** in [verse 13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:17	mbdm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul commanded his readers to “walk by the Spirit” in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “I say this to you because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:17	m7td		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ&σὰρξ&τῆς σαρκός	1	See how you translated this **flesh** in [verse 13](../05/13.md) and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:17	xjj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ&σὰρξ ἐπιθυμεῖ κατὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	The phrase **desires against** implies desiring to do what is **against the Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the flesh desires to do things that are against the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:17	w7kv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ&σὰρξ ἐπιθυμεῖ	1	Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who **desires**. He is referring to what a person **desires** to do as a result of having a sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what you want to do because of your sinful nature” or “the things you want to do because you are sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]).
+5:17	oyog		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸ&Πνεῦμα κατὰ τῆς σαρκός	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If if would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the Spirit desires against the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+5:17	xp0l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the **desires** of **the flesh** and **the Spirit** are against each other. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “This is for the reason that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:17	r3dk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1	The pronoun **these** refers to **the flesh** and **the Spirit**. If if would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the flesh and the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+5:17	ukce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1	Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul said in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:17	l0lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἃ&θέλητε ταῦτα	1	This clause refers to the good **things** that Christians want to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those good things that you would desire to do as Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:18	cyud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Πνεύματι ἄγεσθε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Spirit leads you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:18	san8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	οὐκ ἐστὲ ὑπὸ νόμον	1	Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a ruler whose authority people had to live **under**. He means that Christians are not controlled by the requirements of **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how **under the law** is translated in [Romans 6:14](../../rom/06/14.md). Alternative translation: “the law does not control you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+5:18	esbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον	1	See how you translated **the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+5:19	alfa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἔργα τῆς σαρκός & πορνεία, ἀκαθαρσία, ἀσέλγεια	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **works**, **sexual immorality**, **impurity**, and **licentiousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what the flesh does … being sexually immoral, being impure, being licentious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:19	yf2a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὰ ἔργα τῆς σαρκός	1	Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who has **works**. He is referring to what a person does as a result of having a sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what people do because of their sinful natures” or “the things people do because they are sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+5:19	pu5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς σαρκός	1	See how you translated **flesh** in [verses 13](../05/13.md) and [16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:20	rgjl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰδωλολατρία, φαρμακεία, ἔχθραι, ἔρις, ζῆλοι, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, διχοστασίαι, αἱρέσεις	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **idolatry**, **sorcery**, **hostilities**, **strife**, **jealousy**, **anger**, **rivalry**, **divisions**, and **factions**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “worshiping idols, practicing witchcraft, being hostile, striving with others, being jealous, angrily bursting out, causing people to divide, making factious groups” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:21	fdce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	φθόνοι, μέθαι, κῶμοι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **envy**, **drunkenness**, and **drunken celebrations**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being envious, being drunk, being drunk while celebrating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:21	rs9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν	1	Here Paul speaks of **the kingdom of God** as if it were property that a child could **inherit** from a parent when that parent dies. Paul uses the word **inherit** here to refer to being able to dwell in **the kingdom of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will not dwell in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:22	ejgc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ&καρπὸς τοῦ Πνεύματός	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the fruit** that **the Spirit** gives to believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the fruit that the Spirit gives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+5:22	hez3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ&καρπὸς	1	Here, **fruit** refers to a result or outcome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the product” or “the result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:22	fsxn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγάπη, χαρά, εἰρήνη, μακροθυμία, χρηστότης, ἀγαθωσύνη, πίστις	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love**, **joy**, **peace**, **patience**, **kindness**, **goodness**, and **faithfulness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “acting lovingly, joyfully, peacefully, patiently, kindly, in a good manner, faithfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:22	famj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰρήνη	1	Here, **peace** could mean: (1) a peaceful feeling. Alternate translation: “feeling peaceful” (2) a peaceful relationship with other people. Alternate translation: “peace with others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:23	wl7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πραΰτης, ἐνκράτεια	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **gentleness**, and **self-control**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “acting gently, and controlling oneself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:24	l6ux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὴν σάρκα ἐσταύρωσαν	1	Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person that believers **have crucified**. He means that Christians refuse to live according to their sinful natures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “refuse to live according to their sinful natures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+5:24	e347		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν σάρκα	1	See how you translated the same use of **the flesh** in [verse 13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+5:24	r86y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς παθήμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις	1	These phrases specifically refer to the **passions** and **desires** of **the flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “its passion and desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:24	cgu0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῖς παθήμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **passions**, and **desires**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what it is passionate about and what it desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+5:25	h9hd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+5:25	xvcl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ζῶμεν Πνεύματι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Spirit causes us to be alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+5:25	ldm7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῶμεν	1	Here, **live** refers to a Christian’s spirit being alive, which will result in that person living forever with God in heaven. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we live spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+5:25	sq7b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν	1	See how you translated **walk by the Spirit** in [verse 16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:intro	bv8h				0	# Galatians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter concludes Paul’s letter. His final words address some additional issues that concerned him about the Galatian believers.\n\n### Brothers\n\nPaul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them “brothers” in [verses 1](../06/01.md) and [18[(../06/18.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### New Creation\n\nSomeone who becomes Christian is a new creation that is united with Christ ([6:15](../06/15.md); [2 Corinthians 5:17](../../2co/05/17.md)). Christians have been given new way of living that will result in eternal life. This is more significant than a person’s ancestry or attempts to obey the laws God gave the Jews. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\n\nPaul uses the word “flesh” in a variety of ways throughout this letter. In this chapter he frequently uses “flesh” to refer to sinful human nature. He contrasts “flesh” with the Spirit in [verse 8](../06/08.md). However, he also uses “flesh” to refer to a person’s physical body or outward appearance in [verses 12–13](../06/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
+6:1	ss7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the same use of **Brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+6:1	vm8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἄνθρωπος	1	Here, **a man** does not refer to a particular man, but to any believer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anyone among you” or “one of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+6:1	vts8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προλημφθῇ ἄνθρωπος ἔν τινι παραπτώματι	1	This could refer to: (1) a believer discovering that another believer is committing a sin. Alternate translation: “a man is discovered while committing any trespass” (2) a person who is overcome by temptation and sins. Alternate translation: “a man is overwhelmed by temptation and commits any trespass” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:1	xmbm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔν τινι παραπτώματι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespass**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “trespassing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+6:1	t4rm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ πνευματικοὶ	1	Here, **the spiritual** refers to spiritually immature believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the spiritually mature ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:1	tr5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πνεύματι πραΰτητος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that is characterized by **gentleness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a gentle spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+6:1	zudd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πνεύματι	1	Here, **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or emotional state. It does not refer to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:1	jrve			σκοπῶν	1	Alternate translation: “paying careful attention to” or “looking out for”
+6:1	rrg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σεαυτόν	1	Paul uses the singular pronoun **yourself** here to refer to all his Christian readers. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of **yourself** in your translation. Alternate translation: “yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+6:1	ljx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ καὶ σὺ πειρασθῇς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “lest that person’s sin tempts you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+6:2	l0mz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀλλήλων τὰ βάρη βαστάζετε	1	Paul speaks of the spiritual struggles of immature believers as if they were **burdens** that a person could **carry**. He means that mature Christians should patiently help spiritually weak Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help one another overcome spiritual weakness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:2	jfh0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀλλήλων τὰ βάρη	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **burdens**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what burdens one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+6:2	i7bf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναπληρώσετε	1	Here, **fulfill** refers to obeying completely. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you will completely obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+6:2	m6jz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν νόμον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, **the law of Christ** most likely refers to Christ’s command to love one another in [John 13:34](../../jhn/13/34.md), which Paul also refers to in [verse 14](../05/14.md). It does not refer to a set of rules or the laws that God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Christ commands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:3	v6ts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants his readers to obey what he commanded in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+6:3	eure		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	δοκεῖ & φρεναπατᾷ ἑαυτόν	1	Although the words **himself** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+6:3	m4wk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἶναί τι	1	Here, **to be something** refers to someone arrogantly thinking that he is better than other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be better than others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+6:3	zz1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μηδὲν ὤν	1	Here, **being nothing** refers to someone not being better than other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not being better than others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+6:4	wo1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸ&ἔργον ἑαυτοῦ δοκιμαζέτω ἕκαστος, καὶ τότε εἰς ἑαυτὸν μόνον τὸ καύχημα ἕξει, καὶ οὐκ εἰς τὸν ἕτερον	1	In this verse Paul is addressing his readers in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person instead. Alternate translation: “let each one of you examine your own work, and then you will have reason to boast in yourself and not in someone else” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+6:4	kubv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τὸ&ἑαυτὸν&ἕξει	1	Although the words **his**, **he**, and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+6:4	umjq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ&ἔργον ἑαυτοῦ&τὸ καύχημα ἕξει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **work** and **reason**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the things he does himself … he can reasonably boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+6:4	pb3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς ἑαυτὸν&εἰς τὸν ἕτερον	1	Paul uses **himself** and **someone else** as if they were something that a person could **boast** inside of. He means that people **boast** about themselves or others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “about himself … about someone else” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:5	euhw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants his readers to obey what he commanded in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+6:5	ee8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ ἴδιον φορτίον βαστάσει	1	The phrase **carry his own burden** could mean: (1) people have their own responsibilities and tasks. Alternate translation: “each person must do the work that God has given him” or “each person is responsible for his own work” (2) people are responsible for their own weaknesses and sins. Alternate translation: “each person is responsible for their own sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:5	hwxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ἴδιον φορτίον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **burden**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what burdens him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+6:6	ggkk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	κοινωνείτω & ὁ κατηχούμενος τὸν λόγον, τῷ κατηχοῦντι, ἐν πᾶσιν ἀγαθοῖς	1	In this verse Paul is addressing his readers in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person instead. Alternate translation: “let you who are being taught the word share in all good things with the one who is teaching you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+6:6	irxx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ κατηχούμενος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom someone is teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+6:6	c1rs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Here, **the word** refers to what God had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+6:6	n26e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐν πᾶσιν ἀγαθοῖς	1	Here, **all good things** is a polite way of referring to material possessions, including money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to these things or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in all that one possesses” or “in all possessions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+6:7	o9sk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ πλανᾶσθε, Θεὸς οὐ μυκτηρίζεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not deceive yourselves. No one can mock God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+6:7	tm7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, **for** indicates that what follows is a reason why **God is not mocked**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+6:7	gii9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος, τοῦτο καὶ θερίσει	1	Although **man** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person … that the person will also reap” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+6:7	x5pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃ&ἐὰν σπείρῃ ἄνθρωπος, τοῦτο καὶ θερίσει	1	Here, **sow** refers to doing things that will have consequences, and **reap** represents experiencing those consequences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “just as a farmer gathers in the fruit of the seeds he plants, so everyone experiences the results of whatever they do” or “everyone receives the results of whatever they have done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:8	ejbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	σπείρων εἰς τὴν σάρκα ἑαυτοῦ&σπείρων εἰς τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	Paul continues the metaphor from the previous verse of a farmer **sowing** seeds and harvesting crops. The word **sowing** refers to doing deeds that will have consequences. Here, **sowing to his own flesh** refers to a person doing sinful actions in order to satisfy his sinful nature, and **sowing to the Spirit** refers to a person doing good actions in order to please the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “doings things to satisfy his sinful nature … doing things to please the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
+6:8	p9gl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σάρκα&σαρκὸς	1	See how you translated the same use of **flesh** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:8	lzz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θερίσει&θερίσει	1	In this verse **reap** represents experiencing the consequences of doing something. See how you translated the same use of **reap** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:8	dge9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	φθοράν	1	Here, **destruction** refers to experiencing punishment forever in hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eternal destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:8	cc72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θερίσει φθοράν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+6:9	xgi4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	μὴ ἐνκακῶμεν&θερίσομεν	1	When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the Galatian believers so **we** would be inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+6:9	xruj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ&καλὸν	1	See how you translated **good** in [4:18](../04/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:9	u77c			καιρῷ&ἰδίῳ	1	Alternate translation: “at the proper time”
+6:9	u8fx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι	1	Paul is using a statement to give a condition. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for a condition. Alternate translation: “if not becoming weary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+6:9	hw39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θερίσομεν	1	See how you translated **reap** in [verse 7](../06/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:10	ax66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα οὖν	1	**So then** indicates that what follows in this verse is the concluding result of what Paul has said in [verses 1–9](../06/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Because all these things are true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+6:10	gih4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν&ἐργαζώμεθα	1	When Paul says **we** he is speaking of himself and the Galatian believers so we would be inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+6:10	yjpq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ἀγαθὸν	1	See how you translated **good** in [4:18](../04/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:10	e8qt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντας	1	Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to indicate **all** people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+6:10	jz9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς οἰκείους τῆς πίστεως	1	Here Paul refers to Christians as if they were a **household of the faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who are Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:10	qz9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς πίστεως	1	Here, **the faith** refers to believing in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that has faith in Jesus” or “that believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:11	i7ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἴδετε	1	**See** here is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please observe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+6:11	d6rk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί	1	This could mean: (1) Paul had someone write most of this letter as Paul told him what to write, but Paul himself wrote this last part of the letter. Alternate translation: “with my own hand in the last part of this letter” (2) Paul wrote the whole letter himself. Alternate translation: “with my own hand in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:12	kmd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐπροσωπῆσαι	1	Paul’s readers would have understood that he was referring to making **a good impression** on legalistic Jews who did not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to make a good impression on the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:12	r5p1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν σαρκί	1	Here, **the flesh** refers to someone’s outward physical appearance, specifically the appearance of someone who has been circumcised in order to impress the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with regard to physical appearance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+6:12	hnse		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+6:12	n8mc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ διώκωνται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that the Jews might do the action. Alternate translation: “the Jews might not persecute them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+6:12	jd4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ σταυρῷ τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, **the cross** refers to believing in Christ’s sacrificial death on **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for believing in what Christ Jesus did when he died on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+6:13	xod7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+6:13	cgi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ περιτετμημένοι&ὑμᾶς περιτέμνεσθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones who have had a person circumcise them … a person to circumcise you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+6:13	xtsq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+6:13	q2uh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ σαρκὶ	1	See how you translated the same use of **flesh** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+6:14	yek3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἐμοὶ&μὴ γένοιτο	1	The phrase **may it never be** is an exclamation that communicates a strong desire against doing something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this meaning. Alternate translation: “may I absolutely never” or “may I certainly never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+6:14	p2zz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	ἐμοὶ&μὴ γένοιτο καυχᾶσθαι, εἰ μὴ	1	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “may it ever only be to me to boast” or “may I only ever boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
+6:14	ul40		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ σταυρῷ	1	Here Paul speaks of **the cross** as if it were a location someone could **boast** **in**. He means that he boasts with reference to **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when referring to the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:14	evgd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ σταυρῷ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, **the cross** refers to Christ’s sacrificial death on **the cross**. Paul uses **the cross** here in a slightly different way than he did in [verse 12](../06/12.md). See how you translated the same use of **the cross** in [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “what our Lord Jesus Christ did when he died on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+6:14	vsa8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐμοὶ κόσμος ἐσταύρωται, κἀγὼ κόσμῳ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified the world to me, and me to the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+6:14	miwn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κόσμος&κόσμῳ	1	Here, **the world** could refer to: (1) the entire world system, which is naturally hostile to God. This **world** operates according to the “elementary principles” ([4:3](../04/03.md)) that exist during this “present evil age” ([1:4](../01/04.md)). Alternate translation: “this world system that opposes God … to this world system that opposes God” (2) the system of values that people share who do not honor God, which is how John uses **the world** in [1 John 2:15](../../1jn/02/15.md). Alternate translation: “what people value in the world … to what people value in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+6:14	lpr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ κόσμος ἐσταύρωται	1	Here Paul speaks of **the world** no longer influencing him as if **the world** were a dead man who had been **crucified**. Just as a dead person cannot directly influence anyone, so the world could not influence Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the world does not influence me” or “it is as if the world is dead to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:14	v2qs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	κἀγὼ κόσμῳ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and I have been crucified to the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+6:14	zhnc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κἀγὼ κόσμῳ	1	This could mean: (1) the same as the previous clause, but stated in reverse order for emphasis. Alternate translation: “and I am not influenced by the world” (2) the opposite of the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and I do not influence the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:15	pfcn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	**For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul only boasts “in the cross of our Lord Jesus Christ,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I may boast in the cross because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+6:15	ck7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὔτε γὰρ περιτομή τὶ ἐστιν, οὔτε ἀκροβυστία	1	Here, **anything** refers to being important to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither circumcision is important to God, nor uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+6:15	rd5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ καινὴ κτίσις	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but a new creation is something important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+6:15	n6n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καινὴ κτίσις	1	Here, **a new creation** refers to the whole process when someone trusts in Jesus and the Holy Spirit gives that person a new life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how **new creation** is translated in [2 Corinthians 5:17](../../2co/05/17.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit giving someone a new life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:16	wrnk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	στοιχήσουσιν	1	See how you translated the similar use of **walk** in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:16	evn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ κανόνι τούτῳ	1	Here, **this standard** refers to what Paul said in the previous verse, specifically the importance of someone being a “new creation.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as new creations” or “as those whom the Holy Spirit has given new lives”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:16	n987		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	εἰρήνη ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, καὶ ἔλεος, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul adds a blessing here. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may they and the Israel of God experience peace and mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
+6:16	auo7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνη ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, καὶ ἔλεος, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **peace** and **mercy**, you could express the ideas in a different way. See how you translated **peace** in [1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “may God make them feel peaceful and be merciful to them and to the Israel of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+6:16	b4al		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This could refer to: (1) Jews who believe in Jesus, in which case **and** functions as it usually does to connect two things. Alternate translation: “and upon the Jewish believers of God” (2) everyone who believes in Jesus, in which case **and** indicates that **them** refers to the same group of people as **the Israel of God**. Alternate translation: “that is, upon God’s people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:17	cidu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τοῦ λοιποῦ, κόπους μοι μηδεὶς παρεχέτω; ἐγὼ γὰρ τὰ στίγματα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματί μου βαστάζω	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because I carry in my body the marks of Jesus, from now on let no one cause me trouble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+6:17	cz8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κόπους μοι	1	Here, **trouble** refers to the distress that some of the Galatian Christians caused for Paul because of the problems that he wrote about in this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “trouble me with regard to these issues” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:17	ww8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κόπους μοι μηδεὶς παρεχέτω	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trouble**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “let no one trouble me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+6:17	ahlc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & τὰ στίγματα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματί μου βαστάζω	1	Here Paul speaks about **the marks** on his **body** as if they were objects that he carried around. He means that **the marks** remained on his **body** everywhere he went. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the marks of Jesus are always on my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+6:17	j729		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ στίγματα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, **the marks of Jesus** refers to the scars on Paul’s body that were made by people beating him because he taught about **Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the scars I received because I taught the truth about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+6:18	ch05		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν	1	As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Galatian believers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May your spirit experience kindness from our Lord Jesus Christ” or “I pray that your spirit will have grace from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
+6:18	m7mj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ χάρις	1	See how you translated **grace** in [1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+6:18	r9zk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν	1	Jesus is speaking of the spirits of his readers in general, not of one particular **spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “your spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
+6:18	wywe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν	1	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “you” (2) the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Alternative translation: “your inner being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+6:18	pk25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the same use of **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])